diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html')
| -rw-r--r-- | docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html | 2305 |
1 files changed, 1185 insertions, 1120 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html index d5e3f4948a..3fce2783a9 100644 --- a/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html +++ b/docs/htmldocs/manpages/smb.conf.5.html @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb.conf</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.73.1"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smb.conf.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smb.conf — The configuration file for the Samba suite</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2516069"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p> +<html><head><meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1"><title>smb.conf</title><link rel="stylesheet" href="../samba.css" type="text/css"><meta name="generator" content="DocBook XSL Stylesheets V1.74.0"></head><body bgcolor="white" text="black" link="#0000FF" vlink="#840084" alink="#0000FF"><div class="refentry" lang="en"><a name="smb.conf.5"></a><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="refnamediv"><h2>Name</h2><p>smb.conf — The configuration file for the Samba suite</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2522916"></a><h2>SYNOPSIS</h2><p> The <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file is a configuration file for the Samba suite. <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> contains runtime configuration information for the Samba programs. The <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file is designed to be configured and administered by the <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a> program. The @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, 1/0 or true/false. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved in string values. Some items such as create masks are numeric. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2479226"></a><h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2483409"></a><h2>SECTION DESCRIPTIONS</h2><p> Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global] section) describes a shared resource (known as a “<span class="quote">share</span>”). The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes. @@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ The following sample section defines a file space share. The user has write access to the path <code class="filename">/home/bar</code>. The share is accessed via the share name <code class="literal">foo</code>: </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[foo]</code></em> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH">path = /home/bar</a> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only = no</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /home/bar</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only = no</a> </pre><p> </p><p> The following sample section defines a printable share. The share is read-only, but printable. That is, @@ -64,12 +64,12 @@ ok</em></span> parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere): </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[aprinter]</code></em> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH">path = /usr/spool/public</a> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only = yes</a> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE">printable = yes</a> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok = yes</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /usr/spool/public</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only = yes</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable = yes</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a> </pre><p> - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478266"></a><h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2478272"></a><h3>The [global] section</h3><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481485"></a><h2>SPECIAL SECTIONS</h2><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="id2481491"></a><h3>The [global] section</h3><p> Parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults for sections that do not specifically define certain items. See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information. </p></div><div class="refsect2" lang="en"><a name="HOMESECT"></a><h3>The [homes] section</h3><p> @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ than others. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section: </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[homes]</code></em> -<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only = no</a> +<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only = no</a> </pre><p> </p><p> An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be @@ -137,9 +137,9 @@ it. A typical [printers] entry looks like this: </p><pre class="programlisting"> <em class="parameter"><code>[printers]</code></em> -<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH">path = /usr/spool/public</a> -<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok = yes</a> -<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE">printable = yes</a> +<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path = /usr/spool/public</a> +<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a> +<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable = yes</a> </pre><p> </p><p> All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned. @@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ alias|alias|alias|alias... On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use <code class="literal">printcap name = lpstat</code> to automatically obtain a list of printers. See the <code class="literal">printcap name</code> option for more details. - </p></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2478595"></a><h2>USERSHARES</h2><p>Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to add, modify, and delete + </p></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2481804"></a><h2>USERSHARES</h2><p>Starting with Samba version 3.0.23 the capability for non-root users to add, modify, and delete their own share definitions has been added. This capability is called <span class="emphasis"><em>usershares</em></span> and is controlled by a set of parameters in the [global] section of the smb.conf. The relevant parameters are : @@ -178,13 +178,13 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares </pre><p>Then add the parameters </p><pre class="programlisting"> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERSHAREPATH">usershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares</a> - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERSHAREMAXSHARES">usershare max shares = 10</a> # (or the desired number of shares) + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERSHAREPATH" target="_top">usershare path = /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERSHAREMAXSHARES" target="_top">usershare max shares = 10</a> # (or the desired number of shares) </pre><p> to the global section of your <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. Members of the group foo may then manipulate the user defined shares - using the following commands.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]</span></dt><dd><p>To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare delete sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To delete a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare list wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To list user defined shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare info wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To print information about user defined shares.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525490"></a><h2>PARAMETERS</h2><p>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</p><p> + using the following commands.</p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">net usershare add sharename path [comment] [acl] [guest_ok=[y|n]]</span></dt><dd><p>To create or modify (overwrite) a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare delete sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To delete a user defined share.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare list wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To list user defined shares.</p></dd><dt><span class="term">net usershare info wildcard-sharename</span></dt><dd><p>To print information about user defined shares.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2482031"></a><h2>PARAMETERS</h2><p>Parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</p><p> Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e.g., <span class="emphasis"><em>security</em></span>). Some parameters are usable in all sections (e.g., <span class="emphasis"><em>create mask</em></span>). All others are permissible only in normal sections. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares Parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred synonym. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2525539"></a><h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2532544"></a><h2>VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS</h2><p> Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take substitutions. For example the option “<span class="quote">path = /tmp/%u</span>” is interpreted as “<span class="quote">path = /tmp/john</span>” if the user connected with the username john. @@ -258,8 +258,8 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares </p></dd><dt><span class="term">default case = upper/lower</span></dt><dd><p> controls what the default case is for new filenames (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem). Default <span class="emphasis"><em>lower</em></span>. IMPORTANT NOTE: This option will be used to modify the case of - <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> incoming client filenames, not just new filenames if the options <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive = yes</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE">preserve case = No</a>, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE">short preserve case = No</a> are set. This change is needed as part of the + <span class="emphasis"><em>all</em></span> incoming client filenames, not just new filenames if the options <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CASESENSITIVE" target="_top">case sensitive = yes</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE" target="_top">preserve case = No</a>, + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE" target="_top">short preserve case = No</a> are set. This change is needed as part of the optimisations for directories containing large numbers of files. </p></dd><dt><span class="term">preserve case = yes/no</span></dt><dd><p> controls whether new files (ie. files that don't currently exist in the filesystem) are created with the case @@ -305,7 +305,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares </p></li><li><p> If the service is a guest service, a connection is made as the username given in the <code class="literal">guest account =</code> for the service, irrespective of the supplied password. - </p></li></ol></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526282"></a><h2>REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION</h2><p> + </p></li></ol></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533244"></a><h2>REGISTRY-BASED CONFIGURATION</h2><p> Starting with Samba version 3.2.0, the capability to store Samba configuration in the registry is available. The configuration is stored in the registry key @@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares options stored in registry are used. This can be activated in two different ways:</p><p>Firstly, a registry only configuration is triggered by setting - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND">config backend = registry</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND" target="_top">config backend = registry</a> in the [global] section of <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>. This resets everything that has been read from config files to this point and reads the content of the global configuration @@ -331,7 +331,7 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares This is the recommended method of using registry based configuration.</p><p>Secondly, a mixed configuration can be activated by a special new meaning of the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INCLUDE">include = registry</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INCLUDE" target="_top">include = registry</a> in the [global] section of <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>. This reads the global options from registry with the same priorities as for an include of a text file. @@ -360,19 +360,19 @@ chmod 1770 /usr/local/samba/lib/usershares registry based configuration locally, i.e. directly accessing the database file, circumventing the server. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2526475"></a><h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2526488"></a> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2533420"></a><h2>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</h2><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533430"></a> abort shutdown script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2526489"></a><a name="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that - should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHUTDOWNSCRIPT">shutdown script</a>.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533432"></a><a name="ABORTSHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that + should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHUTDOWNSCRIPT" target="_top">shutdown script</a>.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>, right, this command will be run as user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>abort shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">""</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>abort shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/sbin/shutdown -c</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2526577"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533510"></a> acl check permissions (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2526578"></a><a name="ACLCHECKPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls what <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>does on receiving a protocol request of "open for delete" +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533511"></a><a name="ACLCHECKPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls what <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>does on receiving a protocol request of "open for delete" from a Windows client. If a Windows client doesn't have permissions to delete a file then they expect this to be denied at open time. POSIX systems normally only detect restrictions on delete by actually attempting to delete the file or directory. As Windows clients can (and do) "back out" a @@ -392,10 +392,10 @@ acl check permissions (S) with slightly different semantics was introduced in 3.0.20. That older version is not documented here. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl check permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2478121"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2481367"></a> -acl compatibility (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2478122"></a><a name="ACLCOMPATIBILITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should +acl compatibility (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2481368"></a><a name="ACLCOMPATIBILITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should be compatible with. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>winnt</em></span> for Windows NT 4, <span class="emphasis"><em>win2k</em></span> for Windows 2000 and above and <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>. If you specify <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, the value for this parameter @@ -404,10 +404,10 @@ acl compatibility (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl compatibility</code></em> = <code class="literal">win2k</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2478198"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2481444"></a> acl group control (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2478199"></a><a name="ACLGROUPCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2481445"></a><a name="ACLGROUPCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> In a POSIX filesystem, only the owner of a file or directory and the superuser can modify the permissions and ACLs on a file. If this parameter is set, then Samba overrides this restriction, and also allows the <span class="emphasis"><em>primary group owner</em></span> of a file or directory to modify the permissions and ACLs @@ -423,7 +423,7 @@ acl group control (S) directory hierarchy in much the same way as Windows. This allows all members of a UNIX group to control the permissions on a file or directory they have group ownership on. </p><p> - This parameter is best used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INHERITOWNER">inherit owner</a> option and also + This parameter is best used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INHERITOWNER" target="_top">inherit owner</a> option and also on on a share containing directories with the UNIX <span class="emphasis"><em>setgid bit</em></span> set on them, which causes new files and directories created within it to inherit the group ownership from the containing directory. @@ -434,10 +434,10 @@ acl group control (S) <em class="parameter"><code>dos filemode</code></em> option. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl group control</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2526979"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533901"></a> acl map full control (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2526980"></a><a name="ACLMAPFULLCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533902"></a><a name="ACLMAPFULLCONTROL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>maps a POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" (read/write/execute), the maximum allowed POSIX permission set, into a Windows ACL of "FULL CONTROL". If this parameter is set to true any POSIX ACE entry of "rwx" will be returned in a Windows ACL as "FULL CONTROL", is this parameter is set to false any @@ -445,10 +445,10 @@ acl map full control (S) execute. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>acl map full control</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527035"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533952"></a> add group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527036"></a><a name="ADDGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533953"></a><a name="ADDGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a new group is requested. It will expand any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. The script is free to create a group with @@ -458,24 +458,24 @@ add group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/groupadd %g</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527116"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534027"></a> add machine script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527117"></a><a name="ADDMACHINESCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534028"></a><a name="ADDMACHINESCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a machine is added to Samba's domain and a Unix account matching the machine's name appended with a "$" does not already exist. - </p><p>This option is very similar to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT">add user script</a>, and likewise uses the %u + </p><p>This option is very similar to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">add user script</a>, and likewise uses the %u substitution for the account name. Do not use the %m substitution. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add machine script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add machine script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /var/lib/nobody -s /bin/false %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527204"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534106"></a> add port command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527205"></a><a name="ADDPORTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Samba 3.0.23 introduced support for adding printer ports +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534107"></a><a name="ADDPORTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Samba 3.0.23 introduced support for adding printer ports remotely using the Windows "Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard". This option defines an external program to be executed when smbd receives a request to add a new Port to the system. @@ -484,10 +484,10 @@ add port command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add port command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/addport.sh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527294"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534189"></a> addprinter command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527295"></a><a name="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534190"></a><a name="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the "Printers..." folder displayed a share listing. The APW @@ -518,18 +518,23 @@ addprinter command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>addprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/addprinter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527499"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534377"></a> add share command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527500"></a><a name="ADDSHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534378"></a><a name="ADDSHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> is used to define an external program - or script which will add a new service definition to <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. In order - to successfully execute the <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em>, <code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. uid == 0). + or script which will add a new service definition to + <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. + </p><p> + In order to successfully execute the + <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em>, + <code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator + connects using a root account (i.e. uid == 0) or has the + <code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>. + Scripts defined in the <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> + parameter are executed as root. </p><p> - If the connected account has <code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>, scripts defined in - <em class="parameter"><code>change share</code></em> parameter are executed as root. - </p><p> When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the <em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> with five parameters. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location of the global <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. @@ -543,15 +548,15 @@ add share command (G) Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this share. </p></li></ul></div><p> - This parameter is only used for add file shares. To add printer shares, see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND">addprinter command</a>. + This parameter is only used to add file shares. To add printer shares, see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">addprinter command</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/addshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527703"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534563"></a> add user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527704"></a><a name="ADDUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534564"></a><a name="ADDUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> under special circumstances described below. @@ -563,16 +568,16 @@ add user script (G) <span class="emphasis"><em>ON DEMAND</em></span> when a user accesses the Samba server. </p><p> In order to use this option, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> must <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> be set to - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = share</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT">add user script</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">add user script</a> must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em>, which expands into the UNIX user name to create. </p><p> When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login (session setup in - the SMB protocol) time, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> contacts the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER">password server</a> + the SMB protocol) time, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> contacts the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the authentication succeeds then <code class="literal">smbd</code> attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT">add user script</a> is set then <code class="literal">smbd</code> will + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ADDUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">add user script</a> is set then <code class="literal">smbd</code> will call the specified script <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>, expanding any <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> argument to be the user name to create. </p><p> @@ -580,16 +585,16 @@ add user script (G) continue on as though the UNIX user already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to match existing Windows NT accounts. </p><p> - See also <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER">password server</a>, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEUSERSCRIPT">delete user script</a>. + See also <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a>, + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEUSERSCRIPT" target="_top">delete user script</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2527947"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534774"></a> add user to group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2527948"></a><a name="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534775"></a><a name="ADDUSERTOGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools. It will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>. Any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group name and @@ -601,42 +606,42 @@ add user to group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>add user to group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/adduser %u %g</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528042"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534861"></a> administrative share (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528043"></a><a name="ADMINISTRATIVESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> for +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534862"></a><a name="ADMINISTRATIVESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> for a share, then the share will be an administrative share. The Administrative Shares are the default network shares created by all Windows NT-based operating systems. These are shares like C$, D$ or ADMIN$. The type of these - shares is STYPE_DISKTREE_HIDDEN.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security</a> for more + shares is STYPE_DISKTREE_HIDDEN.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>administrative share</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528108"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534920"></a> admin users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528109"></a><a name="ADMINUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users who will be granted +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534921"></a><a name="ADMINUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share. This means that they will do all file operations as the super-user (root).</p><p>You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, - irrespective of file permissions.</p><p>This parameter will not work with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = share</a> in + irrespective of file permissions.</p><p>This parameter will not work with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> in Samba 3.0. This is by design.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>admin users</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>admin users</code></em> = <code class="literal">jason</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528188"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534992"></a> afs share (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528189"></a><a name="AFSSHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534993"></a><a name="AFSSHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled for this share. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported via the <em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> parameter is a local AFS import. The special AFS features include the attempt to hand-craft an AFS token if you enabled --with-fake-kaserver in configure. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs share</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528239"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535039"></a> afs username map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528240"></a><a name="AFSUSERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535040"></a><a name="AFSUSERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might want to hand-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for. For example this is necessary if you have users from several domain in your AFS Protection Database. One possible scheme to code users @@ -646,38 +651,38 @@ afs username map (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>afs username map</code></em> = <code class="literal">%u@afs.samba.org</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528306"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535102"></a> aio read size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528308"></a><a name="AIOREADSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535103"></a><a name="AIOREADSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will read from file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value. Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining reads and when not using write cache.</p><p>Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3.0 does support - only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined.</p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITECACHESIZE">write cache size</a></p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AIOWRITESIZE">aio write size</a></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio read size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> + only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined.</p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITECACHESIZE" target="_top">write cache size</a></p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AIOWRITESIZE" target="_top">aio write size</a></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio read size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio read size</code></em> = <code class="literal">16384 # Use asynchronous I/O for reads bigger than 16KB request size</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528406"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535188"></a> aio write size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528407"></a><a name="AIOWRITESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535189"></a><a name="AIOWRITESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba has been built with asynchronous I/O support and this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will write to file asynchronously when size of request is bigger than this value. Note that it happens only for non-chained and non-chaining reads and when not using write cache.</p><p>Current implementation of asynchronous I/O in Samba 3.0 does support - only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined.</p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITECACHESIZE">write cache size</a></p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AIOREADSIZE">aio read size</a></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> + only up to 10 outstanding asynchronous requests, read and write combined.</p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITECACHESIZE" target="_top">write cache size</a></p><p>Related command: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#AIOREADSIZE" target="_top">aio read size</a></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>aio write size</code></em> = <code class="literal">16384 # Use asynchronous I/O for writes bigger than 16KB request size</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528504"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535274"></a> algorithmic rid base (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528505"></a><a name="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This determines how Samba will use its +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535275"></a><a name="ALGORITHMICRIDBASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers. </p><p>Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites @@ -692,10 +697,10 @@ algorithmic rid base (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>algorithmic rid base</code></em> = <code class="literal">100000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528580"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535345"></a> allocation roundup size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528581"></a><a name="ALLOCATIONROUNDUPSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an administrator to tune the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535346"></a><a name="ALLOCATIONROUNDUPSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an administrator to tune the allocation size reported to Windows clients. The default size of 1Mb generally results in improved Windows client performance. However, rounding the allocation size may cause @@ -707,11 +712,11 @@ allocation roundup size (S) </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allocation roundup size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0 # (to disable roundups)</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528651"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535409"></a> allow trusted domains (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528652"></a><a name="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - This option only takes effect when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security</a> option is set to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535410"></a><a name="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This option only takes effect when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> option is set to <code class="constant">server</code>, <code class="constant">domain</code> or <code class="constant">ads</code>. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running @@ -725,10 +730,10 @@ allow trusted domains (G) Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA. This can make implementing a security boundary difficult.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>allow trusted domains</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528729"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535482"></a> announce as (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528730"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEAS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what type of server <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535483"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEAS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what type of server <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, @@ -740,22 +745,22 @@ announce as (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce as</code></em> = <code class="literal">Win95</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528804"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535551"></a> announce version (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528805"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEVERSION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the major and minor version numbers +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535552"></a><a name="ANNOUNCEVERSION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server. The default is 4.9. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce version</code></em> = <code class="literal">4.9</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>announce version</code></em> = <code class="literal">2.0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528866"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535607"></a> auth methods (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528867"></a><a name="AUTHMETHODS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535608"></a><a name="AUTHMETHODS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods <code class="literal">smbd</code> - will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security</a>. + will use when authenticating a user. This option defaults to sensible values based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a>. This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances. In the majority (if not all) of production servers, the default setting should be adequate. </p><p> @@ -774,48 +779,48 @@ auth methods (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>auth methods</code></em> = <code class="literal">guest sam winbind</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2528982"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535713"></a> available (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2528984"></a><a name="AVAILABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535714"></a><a name="AVAILABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter lets you "turn off" a service. If <em class="parameter"><code>available = no</code></em>, then <span class="emphasis"><em>ALL</em></span> attempts to connect to the service will fail. Such failures are logged.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>available</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529034"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535761"></a> bind interfaces only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529036"></a><a name="BINDINTERFACESONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter allows the Samba admin +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535762"></a><a name="BINDINTERFACESONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests. It affects file service <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and name service <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> in a slightly different ways.</p><p> For name service it causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the - interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> parameter. <code class="literal">nmbd</code> + interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter. <code class="literal">nmbd</code> also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0.0.0.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages. If this option is not set then <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will - service name requests on all of these sockets. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY">bind interfaces only</a> is set then + service name requests on all of these sockets. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY" target="_top">bind interfaces only</a> is set then <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will check the source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast sockets and discard any that don't match the broadcast addresses of the interfaces in the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> parameter list. As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter list. As unicast packets are received on the other sockets it allows <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to refuse to serve names to machines that send packets that - arrive through any interfaces not listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> list. IP Source address + arrive through any interfaces not listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> list. IP Source address spoofing does defeat this simple check, however, so it must not be used seriously as a security feature for <code class="literal">nmbd</code>. </p><p> - For file service it causes <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to bind only to the interface list given in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> parameter. This restricts the networks that <code class="literal">smbd</code> will + For file service it causes <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to bind only to the interface list given in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter. This restricts the networks that <code class="literal">smbd</code> will serve, to packets coming in on those interfaces. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces. </p><p> - If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY">bind interfaces only</a> is set and the network address - <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> is not added to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> parameter list + If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY" target="_top">bind interfaces only</a> is set and the network address + <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> is not added to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter list <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a> may not work as expected due to the reasons covered below. </p><p> To change a users SMB password, the <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> by default connects to the <span class="emphasis"><em>localhost - 127.0.0.1</em></span> address as an SMB client to issue the password change request. If - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY">bind interfaces only</a> is set then unless the network address - <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> is added to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> parameter list then <code class="literal"> smbpasswd</code> will fail to connect in it's default mode. <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#BINDINTERFACESONLY" target="_top">bind interfaces only</a> is set then unless the network address + <span class="emphasis"><em>127.0.0.1</em></span> is added to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter list then <code class="literal"> smbpasswd</code> will fail to connect in it's default mode. <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> <em class="parameter"><code>-r <em class="replaceable"><code>remote machine</code></em></code></em> parameter, with <em class="replaceable"><code>remote machine</code></em> set to the IP name of the primary interface of the local host. </p><p> @@ -826,10 +831,10 @@ bind interfaces only (G) from starting/stopping/restarting <code class="literal">smbd</code> and <code class="literal">nmbd</code>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>bind interfaces only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529412"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536088"></a> blocking locks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529413"></a><a name="BLOCKINGLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536089"></a><a name="BLOCKINGLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it.</p><p>If this parameter is set and the lock range requested @@ -840,10 +845,10 @@ blocking locks (S) will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>blocking locks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529481"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536152"></a> block size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529482"></a><a name="BLOCKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when reporting disk free +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536153"></a><a name="BLOCKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when reporting disk free sizes. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes. </p><p>Changing this parameter may have some effect on the efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed. This @@ -857,50 +862,53 @@ block size (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>block size</code></em> = <code class="literal">4096</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529564"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536230"></a> <a name="BROWSABLE"></a>browsable -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529565"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#BROWSEABLE">browseable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529595"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536231"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#BROWSEABLE">browseable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536257"></a> browseable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529596"></a><a name="BROWSEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether this share is seen in +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536258"></a><a name="BROWSEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>browseable</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529636"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536296"></a> browse list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529638"></a><a name="BROWSELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will serve a browse list to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536297"></a><a name="BROWSELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will serve a browse list to a client doing a <code class="literal">NetServerEnum</code> call. Normally set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. You should never need to change this.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>browse list</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529697"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536350"></a> <a name="CASESIGNAMES"></a>casesignames -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529698"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529728"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536351"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536377"></a> case sensitive (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529730"></a><a name="CASESENSITIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the discussion in the section <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING">name mangling</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>case sensitive</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536378"></a><a name="CASESENSITIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the discussion in the section <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>case sensitive</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529782"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536424"></a> change notify (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529783"></a><a name="CHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536425"></a><a name="CHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should reply to a client's file change notify requests. </p><p>You should never need to change this parameter</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2529829"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536466"></a> change share command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2529830"></a><a name="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536468"></a><a name="CHANGESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> is used to define an external -program or script which will modify an existing service definition in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. In order to successfully execute the <em class="parameter"><code>change -share command</code></em>, <code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator be -connected using a root account (i.e. uid == 0). +program or script which will modify an existing service definition in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. </p><p> - If the connected account has <code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>, scripts defined in - <em class="parameter"><code>change share</code></em> parameter are executed as root. + In order to successfully execute the + <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em>, + <code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator + connects using a root account (i.e. uid == 0) or has the + <code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>. + Scripts defined in the <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> + parameter are executed as root. </p><p> When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the <em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> with five parameters. @@ -917,16 +925,17 @@ connected using a root account (i.e. uid == 0). Number of maximum simultaneous connections to this share. </p></li></ul></div><p> - This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions. To modify - printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host. + This parameter is only used to modify existing file share definitions. + To modify printer shares, use the "Printers..." folder as seen + when browsing the Samba host. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/addshare</code> +</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>change share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/changeshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530025"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536645"></a> check password script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530026"></a><a name="CHECKPASSWORDSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to check password +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536646"></a><a name="CHECKPASSWORDSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to check password complexity. The password is sent to the program's standard input.</p><p>The program must return 0 on a good password, or any other value if the password is bad. In case the password is considered weak (the program does not return 0) the @@ -935,10 +944,10 @@ check password script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>check password script</code></em> = <code class="literal">check password script = /usr/local/sbin/crackcheck</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530105"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536719"></a> client lanman auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530106"></a><a name="CLIENTLANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> and other samba client +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536720"></a><a name="CLIENTLANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> and other samba client tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the weaker LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only server which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000, Samba, etc... but not @@ -949,11 +958,11 @@ client lanman auth (G) auth</code> parameter is enabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be attempted.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530187"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536795"></a> client ldap sasl wrapping (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530188"></a><a name="CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING">client ldap sasl wrapping</a> defines whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536796"></a><a name="CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTLDAPSASLWRAPPING" target="_top">client ldap sasl wrapping</a> defines whether ldap traffic will be signed or signed and encrypted (sealed). Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>plain</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>sign</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span>. @@ -980,10 +989,10 @@ client ldap sasl wrapping (G) <span class="emphasis"><em>seal</em></span>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client ldap sasl wrapping</code></em> = <code class="literal">plain</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530316"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536911"></a> client ntlmv2 auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530317"></a><a name="CLIENTNTLMV2AUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536912"></a><a name="CLIENTNTLMV2AUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted password response.</p><p>If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more secure than earlier versions) will be sent. Many servers @@ -995,29 +1004,29 @@ client ntlmv2 auth (G) those following 'best practice' security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and not the weaker LM or NTLM.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client ntlmv2 auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530410"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536998"></a> client plaintext auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530411"></a><a name="CLIENTPLAINTEXTAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536999"></a><a name="CLIENTPLAINTEXTAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext password if the server does not support encrypted passwords.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client plaintext auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530453"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537038"></a> client schannel (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530454"></a><a name="CLIENTSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537039"></a><a name="CLIENTSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL">client schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL">client schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not - enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL">client schannel = yes</a> denies access + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not + enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CLIENTSCHANNEL" target="_top">client schannel = yes</a> denies access if the server is not able to speak netlogon schannel. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530551"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537122"></a> client signing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530552"></a><a name="CLIENTSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client offers or requires +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537123"></a><a name="CLIENTSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the client offers or requires the server it talks to to use SMB signing. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. @@ -1026,19 +1035,19 @@ client signing (G) to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530612"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537177"></a> client use spnego (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530613"></a><a name="CLIENTUSESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This variable controls whether Samba clients will try +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537178"></a><a name="CLIENTUSESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This variable controls whether Samba clients will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with supporting servers (including WindowsXP, Windows2000 and Samba 3.0) to agree upon an authentication mechanism. This enables Kerberos authentication in particular.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>client use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530658"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537219"></a> cluster addresses (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530660"></a><a name="CLUSTERADDRESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With this parameter you can add additional addresses +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537220"></a><a name="CLUSTERADDRESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With this parameter you can add additional addresses nmbd will register with a WINS server. These addresses are not necessarily present on all nodes simultaneously, but they will be registered with the WINS server so that clients can contact @@ -1047,36 +1056,36 @@ cluster addresses (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cluster addresses</code></em> = <code class="literal">10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.3</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530720"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537275"></a> clustering (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530722"></a><a name="CLUSTERING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537276"></a><a name="CLUSTERING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should contact ctdb for accessing its tdb files and use ctdb as a backend for its messaging backend. </p><p>Set this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> only if you have a cluster setup with ctdb running. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>clustering</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530774"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537323"></a> comment (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530775"></a><a name="COMMENT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a text field that is seen next to a share +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537324"></a><a name="COMMENT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via <code class="literal">net view</code> to list what shares are available.</p><p>If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the - machine name then see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSTRING">server string</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> = <code class="literal"> + machine name then see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSTRING" target="_top">server string</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # No comment</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>comment</code></em> = <code class="literal">Fred's Files</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530857"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537398"></a> config backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530858"></a><a name="CONFIGBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537399"></a><a name="CONFIGBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls the backend for storing the configuration. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>file</em></span> (the default) and <span class="emphasis"><em>registry</em></span>. - When <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND">config backend = registry</a> + When <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CONFIGBACKEND" target="_top">config backend = registry</a> is encountered while loading <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span>, the configuration read so far is dropped and the global options are read from registry instead. So this triggers a @@ -1090,10 +1099,10 @@ config backend (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">registry</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2530958"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537487"></a> config file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2530959"></a><a name="CONFIGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the config file +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537488"></a><a name="CONFIGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the default (usually <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>). There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set in the config file!</p><p>For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed @@ -1103,10 +1112,10 @@ config file (G) (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few clients).</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>config file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531027"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537553"></a> copy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531028"></a><a name="COPY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows you to "clone" service +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537554"></a><a name="COPY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries. The specified service is simply duplicated under the current service's name. Any parameters specified in the current section will override those in the section being copied.</p><p>This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and @@ -1116,13 +1125,13 @@ copy (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>copy</code></em> = <code class="literal">otherservice</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531094"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537615"></a> <a name="CREATEMODE"></a>create mode -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531096"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531126"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537616"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537642"></a> create mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531127"></a><a name="CREATEMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537643"></a><a name="CREATEMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a file. Any bit <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> set here will @@ -1132,36 +1141,36 @@ create mask (S) write and execute bits from the UNIX modes. </p><p> Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE">force create mode</a> parameter which is set to 000 by default. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" target="_top">force create mode</a> parameter which is set to 000 by default. </p><p> - This parameter does not affect directory masks. See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a> + This parameter does not affect directory masks. See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" target="_top">directory mask</a> for details. </p><p> Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the - administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK">security mask</a>. + administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" target="_top">security mask</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>create mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0744</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>create mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0775</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531264"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537763"></a> csc policy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531265"></a><a name="CSCPOLICY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537764"></a><a name="CSCPOLICY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This stands for <span class="emphasis"><em>client-side caching policy</em></span>, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable. </p><p> These values correspond to those used on Windows servers. </p><p> For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline caching disabled using - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CSCPOLICY">csc policy = disable</a>. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CSCPOLICY" target="_top">csc policy = disable</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>csc policy</code></em> = <code class="literal">manual</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>csc policy</code></em> = <code class="literal">programs</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531349"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537838"></a> ctdbd socket (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531350"></a><a name="CTDBDSOCKET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you set <code class="literal">clustering=yes</code>, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537839"></a><a name="CTDBDSOCKET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If you set <code class="literal">clustering=yes</code>, you need to tell Samba where ctdbd listens on its unix domain socket. The default path as of ctdb 1.0 is /tmp/ctdb.socket which you have to explicitly set for Samba in smb.conf. @@ -1169,11 +1178,24 @@ ctdbd socket (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ctdbd socket</code></em> = <code class="literal">/tmp/ctdb.socket</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531415"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537898"></a> + +cups connection timeout (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537899"></a><a name="CUPSCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. + </p><p> + If set, this option specifies the number of seconds that smbd will wait + whilst trying to contact to the CUPS server. The connection will fail + if it takes longer than this number of seconds. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code> +</em></span> +</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537970"></a> cups options (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531416"></a><a name="CUPSOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537971"></a><a name="CUPSOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. Its value is a free form string of options passed directly to the cups library. </p><p> @@ -1194,11 +1216,11 @@ cups options (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups options</code></em> = <code class="literal">"raw media=a4"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531533"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538068"></a> cups server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531534"></a><a name="CUPSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538069"></a><a name="CUPSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">cups</code>. </p><p> If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons. @@ -1211,10 +1233,10 @@ cups server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>cups server</code></em> = <code class="literal">mycupsserver:1631</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531641"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538166"></a> deadtime (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531642"></a><a name="DEADTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538167"></a><a name="DEADTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero.</p><p>This is useful to stop a server's resources being @@ -1226,81 +1248,81 @@ deadtime (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deadtime</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531722"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538243"></a> debug class (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531723"></a><a name="DEBUGCLASS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538244"></a><a name="DEBUGCLASS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> With this boolean parameter enabled, the debug class (DBGC_CLASS) will be displayed in the debug header. </p><p> For more information about currently available debug classes, see - section about <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>. + section about <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL" target="_top">log level</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug class</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531781"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538294"></a> debug hires timestamp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531782"></a><a name="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538295"></a><a name="DEBUGHIRESTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on. </p><p> - Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. + Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug hires timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531842"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538349"></a> debug pid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531844"></a><a name="DEBUGPID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538350"></a><a name="DEBUGPID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When using only one log file for more then one forked <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on. </p><p> - Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. + Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug pid</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531911"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538411"></a> debug prefix timestamp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531912"></a><a name="DEBUGPREFIXTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538412"></a><a name="DEBUGPREFIXTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> With this option enabled, the timestamp message header is prefixed to the debug message without the - filename and function information that is included with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a> + filename and function information that is included with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> parameter. This gives timestamps to the messages without adding an additional line. </p><p> - Note that this parameter overrides the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a> parameter. + Note that this parameter overrides the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug prefix timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2531984"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538474"></a> <a name="TIMESTAMPLOGS"></a>timestamp logs -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2531985"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532016"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538475"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538501"></a> debug timestamp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532017"></a><a name="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538502"></a><a name="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default. If you are running at a high - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL">debug level</a> these timestamps can be distracting. This + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL" target="_top">debug level</a> these timestamps can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug timestamp</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532072"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538550"></a> debug uid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532073"></a><a name="DEBUGUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538551"></a><a name="DEBUGUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on. </p><p> - Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. + Note that the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGTIMESTAMP" target="_top">debug timestamp</a> must be on for this to have an effect. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>debug uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532132"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538603"></a> default case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532133"></a><a name="DEFAULTCASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING">name mangling</a>. - Also note the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE">short preserve case</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default case</code></em> = <code class="literal">lower</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538604"></a><a name="DEFAULTCASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>. + Also note the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SHORTPRESERVECASE" target="_top">short preserve case</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default case</code></em> = <code class="literal">lower</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532196"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538657"></a> default devmode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532197"></a><a name="DEFAULTDEVMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only applicable to <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE">printable</a> services. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538658"></a><a name="DEFAULTDEVMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only applicable to <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTABLE" target="_top">printable</a> services. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings. The device mode can only correctly be @@ -1323,19 +1345,19 @@ default devmode (S) see the <a class="ulink" href="http://msdn.microsoft.com/" target="_top">MSDN documentation</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default devmode</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532293"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538745"></a> <a name="DEFAULT"></a>default -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532294"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEFAULTSERVICE">default service</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532325"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538746"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DEFAULTSERVICE">default service</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538772"></a> default service (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532326"></a><a name="DEFAULTSERVICE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a service +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538773"></a><a name="DEFAULTSERVICE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found. Note that the square brackets are <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> given in the parameter value (see example below).</p><p>There is no default value for this parameter. If this parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an error.</p><p> - Typically the default service would be a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READ-ONLY">read-only</a> service.</p><p>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal + Typically the default service would be a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READ-ONLY" target="_top">read-only</a> service.</p><p>Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use macros like <em class="parameter"><code>%S</code></em> to make a wildcard service. </p><p>Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service used in the default service will get mapped to a "/". This allows for @@ -1343,10 +1365,10 @@ default service (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>default service</code></em> = <code class="literal">pub</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532439"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538874"></a> defer sharing violations (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532440"></a><a name="DEFERSHARINGVIOLATIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538875"></a><a name="DEFERSHARINGVIOLATIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Windows allows specifying how a file will be shared with other processes when it is opened. Sharing violations occur when a file is opened by a different process using options that violate @@ -1359,29 +1381,29 @@ defer sharing violations (G) designed to enable Samba to more correctly emulate Windows. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>defer sharing violations</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532498"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538929"></a> delete group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532499"></a><a name="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538930"></a><a name="DELETEGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will be run <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a group is requested to be deleted. It will expand any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> to the group name passed. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete group script</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532559"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538985"></a> deleteprinter command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532560"></a><a name="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538986"></a><a name="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now possible to delete a printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call.</p><p>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically deleted from the underlying printing system. The - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">deleteprinter command</a> defines a script to be run which + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a> defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer from the print system and from <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. - </p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">deleteprinter command</a> is - automatically called with only one parameter: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>. - </p><p>Once the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">deleteprinter command</a> has + </p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a> is + automatically called with only one parameter: <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERNAME" target="_top">printer name</a>. + </p><p>Once the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a> has been executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will reparse the <code class="filename"> smb.conf</code> to check that the associated printer no longer exists. If the sharename is still valid, then <code class="literal">smbd @@ -1389,28 +1411,30 @@ deleteprinter command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>deleteprinter command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/removeprinter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532710"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539112"></a> delete readonly (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532712"></a><a name="DELETEREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539113"></a><a name="DELETEREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted. This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</p><p>This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete readonly</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532760"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539158"></a> delete share command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532761"></a><a name="DELETESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539159"></a><a name="DELETESHARECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Samba 2.2.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4.0 Server Manager. The <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> is used to define an external program or script which will remove an existing service definition from - <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. In order to successfully execute the - <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em>, <code class="literal">smbd</code> - requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i.e. uid == 0). + <code class="filename">smb.conf</code>. + </p><p>In order to successfully execute the + <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em>, + <code class="literal">smbd</code> requires that the administrator + connects using a root account (i.e. uid == 0) or has the + <code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>. + Scripts defined in the <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> + parameter are executed as root. </p><p> - If the connected account has <code class="literal">SeDiskOperatorPrivilege</code>, scripts defined in - <em class="parameter"><code>change share</code></em> parameter are executed as root. - </p><p> When executed, <code class="literal">smbd</code> will automatically invoke the <em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> with two parameters. </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>configFile</code></em> - the location @@ -1419,15 +1443,15 @@ delete share command (G) the existing service. </p></li></ul></div><p> This parameter is only used to remove file shares. To delete printer shares, - see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND">deleteprinter command</a>. + see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND" target="_top">deleteprinter command</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete share command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/bin/delshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2532931"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539309"></a> delete user from group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2532932"></a><a name="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Full path to the script that will be called when +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539310"></a><a name="DELETEUSERFROMGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools. It will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span>. Any <em class="parameter"><code>%g</code></em> will be replaced with the group name and @@ -1436,10 +1460,10 @@ delete user from group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user from group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/deluser %u %g</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533016"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539389"></a> delete user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533017"></a><a name="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539390"></a><a name="DELETEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when managing users with remote RPC (NT) tools. </p><p>This script is called when a remote client removes a user @@ -1448,12 +1472,12 @@ delete user script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533099"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539466"></a> delete veto files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533100"></a><a name="DELETEVETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used when Samba is attempting to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539467"></a><a name="DELETEVETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories - (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES">veto files</a> + (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES" target="_top">veto files</a> option). If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> (the default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the directory delete will fail. This is usually what you want.</p><p>If this option is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, then Samba @@ -1461,14 +1485,14 @@ delete veto files (S) the vetoed directory. This can be useful for integration with file serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing - (e.g. <code class="filename">.AppleDouble</code>)</p><p>Setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEVETOFILES">delete veto files = yes</a> allows these + (e.g. <code class="filename">.AppleDouble</code>)</p><p>Setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEVETOFILES" target="_top">delete veto files = yes</a> allows these directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>delete veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533196"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539551"></a> dfree cache time (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533197"></a><a name="DFREECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539552"></a><a name="DFREECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <em class="parameter"><code>dfree cache time</code></em> should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the @@ -1476,15 +1500,15 @@ dfree cache time (S) </p><p> This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21. It specifies in seconds the time that smbd will cache the output of a disk free query. If set to zero (the default) no caching is done. This allows a heavily - loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DFREECOMMAND">dfree command</a> scripts increasing the load. + loaded server to prevent rapid spawning of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DFREECOMMAND" target="_top">dfree command</a> scripts increasing the load. </p><p> By default this parameter is zero, meaning no caching will be done. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dfree cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">dfree cache time = 60</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533279"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539624"></a> dfree command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533280"></a><a name="DFREECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539625"></a><a name="DFREECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <em class="parameter"><code>dfree command</code></em> setting should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" @@ -1495,7 +1519,7 @@ dfree command (S) function. </p><p> In Samba version 3.0.21 this parameter has been changed to be a per-share parameter, and in addition the - parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DFREECACHETIME">dfree cache time</a> was added to allow the output of this script to be cached + parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DFREECACHETIME" target="_top">dfree cache time</a> was added to allow the output of this script to be cached for systems under heavy load. </p><p> The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a directory in the filesystem being queried. @@ -1522,13 +1546,13 @@ df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $(NF-4),$(NF-2)}' By default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dfree command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/dfree</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533411"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539745"></a> <a name="DIRECTORYMODE"></a>directory mode -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533412"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533443"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539746"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539772"></a> directory mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533444"></a><a name="DIRECTORYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is the octal modes which are +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539773"></a><a name="DIRECTORYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories.</p><p>When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, @@ -1539,22 +1563,22 @@ directory mask (S) created.</p><p>The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the directory to modify it.</p><p>Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode - created from this parameter with the value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE">force directory mode</a> parameter. + created from this parameter with the value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" target="_top">force directory mode</a> parameter. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i.e. no extra mode bits are added).</p><p>Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors. If the administrator wishes to enforce - a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK">directory security mask</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code> + a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" target="_top">directory security mask</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0775</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533561"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539877"></a> directory security mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533562"></a><a name="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539878"></a><a name="DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box.</p><p> This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the incoming permission bits, thus resetting - any bits not in this mask. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE">force directory security mode</a>, which works similar like this one but uses logical OR instead of AND. + any bits not in this mask. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE" target="_top">force directory security mode</a>, which works similar like this one but uses logical OR instead of AND. Essentially, zero bits in this mask are a set of bits that will always be set to zero. </p><p> Essentially, all bits set to zero in this mask will result in setting to zero the corresponding bits on the @@ -1569,19 +1593,19 @@ directory security mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>directory security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0700</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533671"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539978"></a> disable netbios (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533672"></a><a name="DISABLENETBIOS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539979"></a><a name="DISABLENETBIOS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP. </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Clients that only support netbios won't be able to see your samba server when netbios support is disabled. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>disable netbios</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533721"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540024"></a> disable spoolss (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533722"></a><a name="DISABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540025"></a><a name="DISABLESPOOLSS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2.0.x. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using Lanman style printing commands. Windows 9x/ME will be unaffected by @@ -1593,22 +1617,22 @@ disable spoolss (G) <span class="emphasis"><em>Be very careful about enabling this parameter.</em></span> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>disable spoolss</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533776"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540075"></a> display charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533777"></a><a name="DISPLAYCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540076"></a><a name="DISPLAYCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr. The default value is "LOCALE", which means automatically set, depending on the current locale. The value should generally be the same as the value of the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXCHARSET">unix charset</a>. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXCHARSET" target="_top">unix charset</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>display charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">"LOCALE" or "ASCII" (depending on the system)</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>display charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">UTF8</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533852"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540141"></a> dmapi support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533853"></a><a name="DMAPISUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540142"></a><a name="DMAPISUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should use DMAPI to determine whether a file is offline or not. This would typically be used in conjunction with a hierarchical storage system that automatically migrates files to tape. @@ -1623,10 +1647,10 @@ dmapi support (S) </p><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dmapi support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533915"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540200"></a> dns proxy (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533916"></a><a name="DNSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server and +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540201"></a><a name="DNSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying client.</p><p>Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 @@ -1635,52 +1659,52 @@ dns proxy (G) DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dns proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2533984"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540264"></a> domain logons (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2533985"></a><a name="DOMAINLOGONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540265"></a><a name="DOMAINLOGONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the Samba server will provide the netlogon service for Windows 9X network logons for the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> it is in. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> it is in. This will also cause the Samba server to act as a domain controller for NT4 style domain services. For more details on setting up this feature see the Domain Control chapter of the Samba HOWTO Collection. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>domain logons</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534045"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540317"></a> domain master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534046"></a><a name="DOMAINMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540318"></a><a name="DOMAINMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to enable WAN-wide browse list collation. Setting this option causes <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a>. Local master browsers in the same <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> on + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a>. Local master browsers in the same <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> on broadcast-isolated subnets will give this <code class="literal">nmbd</code> their local browse lists, and then ask <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network. Browser clients will then contact their local master browser, and will receive the domain-wide browse list, instead of just the list for their broadcast-isolated subnet. </p><p> - Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> by default (i.e. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting + Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> by default (i.e. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this). This means that if this parameter is set and <code class="literal">nmbd</code> claims the - special name for a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross + special name for a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely and may fail. </p><p> - If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS">domain logons = yes</a>, then the default behavior is to enable the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER">domain master</a> parameter. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS">domain logons</a> is not enabled (the - default setting), then neither will <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER">domain master</a> be enabled by default. + If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" target="_top">domain logons = yes</a>, then the default behavior is to enable the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master</a> parameter. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" target="_top">domain logons</a> is not enabled (the + default setting), then neither will <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master</a> be enabled by default. </p><p> - When <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS">domain logons = Yes</a> the default setting for this parameter is - Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER">domain master = No</a>, + When <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINLOGONS" target="_top">domain logons = Yes</a> the default setting for this parameter is + Yes, with the result that Samba will be a PDC. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master = No</a>, Samba will function as a BDC. In general, this parameter should be set to 'No' only on a BDC. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>domain master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534276"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540508"></a> dont descend (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534277"></a><a name="DONTDESCEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>There are certain directories on some systems +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540509"></a><a name="DONTDESCEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>There are certain directories on some systems (e.g., the <code class="filename">/proc</code> tree under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive). This parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories @@ -1691,18 +1715,18 @@ dont descend (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dont descend</code></em> = <code class="literal">/proc,/dev</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534361"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540586"></a> dos charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534362"></a><a name="DOSCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>DOS SMB clients assume the server has +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540587"></a><a name="DOSCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do. This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS clients. </p><p>The default depends on which charsets you have installed. Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in - case it is not available. Run <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> to check the default on your system.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534405"></a> + case it is not available. Run <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a> to check the default on your system.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540628"></a> dos filemode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534406"></a><a name="DOSFILEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The default behavior in Samba is to provide +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540629"></a><a name="DOSFILEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users. Enabling this parameter @@ -1713,10 +1737,10 @@ dos filemode (S) the group is only granted read access. Ownership of the file/directory may also be changed.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filemode</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534455"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540684"></a> dos filetime resolution (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534456"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540685"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMERESOLUTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second @@ -1731,10 +1755,10 @@ dos filetime resolution (S) this option causes the two timestamps to match, and Visual C++ is happy.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filetime resolution</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534523"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540748"></a> dos filetimes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534524"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540749"></a><a name="DOSFILETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change the timestamp on it. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp. By default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the @@ -1748,20 +1772,20 @@ dos filetimes (S) shared between users. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>dos filetimes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534594"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540813"></a> ea support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534595"></a><a name="EASUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow clients to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540814"></a><a name="EASUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow clients to attempt to store OS/2 style Extended attributes on a share. In order to enable this parameter the underlying filesystem exported by the share must support extended attributes (such as provided on XFS and EXT3 on Linux, with the correct kernel patches). On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ea support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534651"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540866"></a> enable asu support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534652"></a><a name="ENABLEASUSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540867"></a><a name="ENABLEASUSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Hosts running the "Advanced Server for Unix (ASU)" product require some special accomodations such as creating a builting [ADMIN$] share that only supports IPC connections. The has been the default behavior in smbd for many years. However, certain Microsoft applications @@ -1769,10 +1793,10 @@ enable asu support (G) an [ADMIN$} file share. Disabling this parameter allows for creating an [ADMIN$] file share in smb.conf.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable asu support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534701"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540911"></a> enable privileges (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534702"></a><a name="ENABLEPRIVILEGES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540912"></a><a name="ENABLEPRIVILEGES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls whether or not smbd will honor privileges assigned to specific SIDs via either <code class="literal">net rpc rights</code> or one of the Windows user and group manager tools. This parameter is enabled by default. It can be disabled to prevent members of the Domain Admins group from being able to @@ -1785,10 +1809,10 @@ enable privileges (G) Please read the extended description provided in the Samba HOWTO documentation. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enable privileges</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534766"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540972"></a> encrypt passwords (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534767"></a><a name="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540973"></a><a name="ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client. Note that Windows NT 4.0 SP3 and above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a registry entry is changed. To use encrypted passwords in @@ -1807,14 +1831,14 @@ encrypt passwords (G) </p><p>In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> must either have access to a local <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a> file (see the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> program for information on how to set up - and maintain this file), or set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = [server|domain|ads]</a> parameter which + and maintain this file), or set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = [server|domain|ads]</a> parameter which causes <code class="literal">smbd</code> to authenticate against another server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>encrypt passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534879"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541076"></a> enhanced browsing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534880"></a><a name="ENHANCEDBROWSING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option enables a couple of enhancements to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541077"></a><a name="ENHANCEDBROWSING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations. </p><p>The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular @@ -1827,10 +1851,10 @@ enhanced browsing (G) to stay around forever which can be annoying.</p><p>In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enhanced browsing</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2534950"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541137"></a> enumports command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2534951"></a><a name="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541138"></a><a name="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port @@ -1847,10 +1871,10 @@ enumports command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>enumports command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/listports</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535039"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541218"></a> eventlog list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535040"></a><a name="EVENTLOGLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of log names that Samba will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541219"></a><a name="EVENTLOGLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of log names that Samba will report to the Microsoft EventViewer utility. The listed eventlogs will be associated with tdb file on disk in the <code class="filename">$(lockdir)/eventlog</code>. @@ -1863,10 +1887,10 @@ eventlog list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>eventlog list</code></em> = <code class="literal">Security Application Syslog Apache</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535118"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541291"></a> fake directory create times (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535120"></a><a name="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541292"></a><a name="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files and directories. This is not the same as the ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep. Setting @@ -1888,17 +1912,17 @@ fake directory create times (S) ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as expected.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fake directory create times</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535198"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541359"></a> fake oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535199"></a><a name="FAKEOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541360"></a><a name="FAKEOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations. If a server grants an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file data. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close operations. This can give enormous performance benefits. </p><p>When you set <code class="literal">fake oplocks = yes</code>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will - always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file.</p><p>It is generally much better to use the real <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> support rather + always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file.</p><p>It is generally much better to use the real <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> support rather than this parameter.</p><p>If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see @@ -1907,10 +1931,10 @@ fake oplocks (S) files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption. Use this option carefully!</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fake oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535290"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541443"></a> follow symlinks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535291"></a><a name="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541444"></a><a name="FOLLOWSYMLINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> from following symbolic links in a particular share. Setting this parameter to <code class="constant">no</code> prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an error). This option is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic @@ -1920,10 +1944,10 @@ follow symlinks (S) This option is enabled (i.e. <code class="literal">smbd</code> will follow symbolic links) by default. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>follow symlinks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535365"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541513"></a> force create mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535366"></a><a name="FORCECREATEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541514"></a><a name="FORCECREATEMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span> be set on a file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created. The default for this parameter is (in octal) @@ -1935,10 +1959,10 @@ force create mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force create mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535446"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541586"></a> force directory mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535447"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541587"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will <span class="emphasis"><em>always</em></span> be set on a directory created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is being created. The default for this @@ -1951,15 +1975,15 @@ force directory mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">0755</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535527"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541661"></a> force directory security mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535528"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541662"></a><a name="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this - mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK">directory security mask</a>, which works in a similar manner to this one, but uses a logical AND instead + mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYSECURITYMASK" target="_top">directory security mask</a>, which works in a similar manner to this one, but uses a logical AND instead of an OR. </p><p> Essentially, this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, @@ -1975,13 +1999,13 @@ force directory security mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force directory security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">700</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535631"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541757"></a> <a name="GROUP"></a>group -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535632"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#FORCEGROUP">force group</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535663"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541758"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#FORCEGROUP">force group</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541784"></a> force group (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535664"></a><a name="FORCEGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541785"></a><a name="FORCEGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will use the named group for @@ -1999,16 +2023,16 @@ force group (S) that only users who are already in group sys will have their default primary group assigned to sys when accessing this Samba share. All other users will retain their ordinary primary group.</p><p> - If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEUSER">force user</a> parameter is also set the group specified in + If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEUSER" target="_top">force user</a> parameter is also set the group specified in <em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> will override the primary group set in <em class="parameter"><code>force user</code></em>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force group</code></em> = <code class="literal">agroup</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535778"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541889"></a> force printername (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535779"></a><a name="FORCEPRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When printing from Windows NT (or later), +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541890"></a><a name="FORCEPRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When printing from Windows NT (or later), each printer in <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> has two associated names which can be used by the client. The first is the sharename (or shortname) defined in smb.conf. This @@ -2031,15 +2055,15 @@ force printername (S) not be able to delete printer connections from their local Printers folder.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force printername</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535870"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541980"></a> force security mode (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535871"></a><a name="FORCESECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541981"></a><a name="FORCESECURITYMODE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this - mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK">security mask</a>, which works similar like this one but uses logical AND instead of OR. + mask that the user may have modified to be on. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK" target="_top">security mask</a>, which works similar like this one but uses logical AND instead of OR. </p><p> Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be on. @@ -2054,10 +2078,10 @@ force security mode (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force security mode</code></em> = <code class="literal">700</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2535970"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542082"></a> force unknown acl user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2535972"></a><a name="FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542083"></a><a name="FORCEUNKNOWNACLUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set, a Windows NT ACL that contains an unknown SID (security descriptor, or representation of a user or group id) as the owner or group owner of the file will be silently mapped into the current UNIX uid or gid of the currently connected user. @@ -2071,10 +2095,10 @@ force unknown acl user (S) Try using this parameter when XCOPY /O gives an ACCESS_DENIED error. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force unknown acl user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536033"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542145"></a> force user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536034"></a><a name="FORCEUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542146"></a><a name="FORCEUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service. This is useful for sharing files. You should also use it carefully as using it incorrectly can cause security problems.</p><p>This user name only gets used once a connection is established. @@ -2088,10 +2112,10 @@ force user (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>force user</code></em> = <code class="literal">auser</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536109"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542221"></a> fstype (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536110"></a><a name="FSTYPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542222"></a><a name="FSTYPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when a client queries the filesystem type for a share. The default type is <code class="constant">NTFS</code> for compatibility @@ -2101,10 +2125,10 @@ fstype (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>fstype</code></em> = <code class="literal">Samba</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536190"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542303"></a> get quota command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536191"></a><a name="GETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">get quota command</code> should only be used +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542304"></a><a name="GETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">get quota command</code> should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available you have compiled Samba with the <code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> option or on Linux with @@ -2117,19 +2141,19 @@ get quota command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>get quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/query_quota</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536378"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542490"></a> getwd cache (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536379"></a><a name="GETWDCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542491"></a><a name="GETWDCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a tuning option. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially - when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>getwd cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> + when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS" target="_top">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>getwd cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536438"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542550"></a> guest account (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536439"></a><a name="GUESTACCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a username which will be used for access - to services which are specified as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok</a> (see below). Whatever privileges this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542551"></a><a name="GUESTACCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a username which will be used for access + to services which are specified as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a> (see below). Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service. This user must exist in the password file, but does not require a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice @@ -2146,40 +2170,40 @@ guest account (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest account</code></em> = <code class="literal">ftp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536546"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542658"></a> <a name="PUBLIC"></a>public -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536547"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTOK">guest ok</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536577"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542659"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTOK">guest ok</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542689"></a> guest ok (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536578"></a><a name="GUESTOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542690"></a><a name="GUESTOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service. - Privileges will be those of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a>.</p><p>This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RESTRICTANONYMOUS">restrict anonymous = 2</a> - </p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security</a> for more information about this option. + Privileges will be those of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p><p>This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#RESTRICTANONYMOUS" target="_top">restrict anonymous = 2</a> + </p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest ok</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536665"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542777"></a> <a name="ONLYGUEST"></a>only guest -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536666"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTONLY">guest only</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536697"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542778"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#GUESTONLY">guest only</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542810"></a> guest only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536698"></a><a name="GUESTONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542811"></a><a name="GUESTONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code> for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted. - This parameter will have no effect if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok</a> is not set for the service.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security</a> for more information about this option. + This parameter will have no effect if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok</a> is not set for the service.</p><p>See the section below on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security</a> for more information about this option. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536770"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542882"></a> hide dot files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536771"></a><a name="HIDEDOTFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542884"></a><a name="HIDEDOTFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with a dot appear as hidden files.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide dot files</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536812"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542925"></a> hide files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536813"></a><a name="HIDEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of files or directories that are not +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542926"></a><a name="HIDEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are accessible. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or directories that match.</p><p>Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' @@ -2201,33 +2225,33 @@ hide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/ </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide files</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # no file are hidden</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536901"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543014"></a> hide special files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536902"></a><a name="HIDESPECIALFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543015"></a><a name="HIDESPECIALFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and fifo's in directory listings. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide special files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536943"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543057"></a> hide unreadable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536944"></a><a name="HIDEUNREADABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543058"></a><a name="HIDEUNREADABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be read. Defaults to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide unreadable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2536986"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543099"></a> hide unwriteable files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2536987"></a><a name="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543100"></a><a name="HIDEUNWRITEABLEFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to. Defaults to off. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hide unwriteable files</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537030"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543144"></a> homedir map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537031"></a><a name="HOMEDIRMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NISHOMEDIR">nis homedir</a> is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> is also acting as a Win95/98 <em class="parameter"><code>logon server</code></em> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543145"></a><a name="HOMEDIRMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NISHOMEDIR" target="_top">nis homedir</a> is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> is also acting as a Win95/98 <em class="parameter"><code>logon server</code></em> then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's home directory should be extracted. At present, only the Sun auto.home map format is understood. The form of the map is: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -2241,21 +2265,21 @@ homedir map (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>homedir map</code></em> = <code class="literal">amd.homedir</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537143"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543256"></a> host msdfs (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537144"></a><a name="HOSTMSDFS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543257"></a><a name="HOSTMSDFS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server. </p><p> - See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT">msdfs root</a> share level parameter. For more information on + See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" target="_top">msdfs root</a> share level parameter. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSFDS chapter in the book Samba3-HOWTO. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>host msdfs</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537207"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543320"></a> hostname lookups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537208"></a><a name="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543322"></a><a name="HOSTNAMELOOKUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead. An example place where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking the <code class="literal">hosts deny</code> and <code class="literal">hosts allow</code>. @@ -2263,13 +2287,13 @@ hostname lookups (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hostname lookups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537280"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543394"></a> <a name="ALLOWHOSTS"></a>allow hosts -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537281"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537312"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543395"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543426"></a> hosts allow (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537313"></a><a name="HOSTSALLOW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A synonym for this parameter is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWHOSTS">allow hosts</a>.</p><p>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543427"></a><a name="HOSTSALLOW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A synonym for this parameter is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ALLOWHOSTS" target="_top">allow hosts</a>.</p><p>This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access a service.</p><p>If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service has a different setting.</p><p>You can specify the hosts by name or IP number. For @@ -2279,7 +2303,7 @@ hosts allow (S) page <code class="filename">hosts_access(5)</code>. Note that this man page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will be given here also.</p><p>Note that the localhost address 127.0.0.1 will always - be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTSDENY">hosts deny</a> option.</p><p>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and + be allowed access unless specifically denied by a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTSDENY" target="_top">hosts deny</a> option.</p><p>You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups. The <span class="emphasis"><em>EXCEPT</em></span> keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list. The following examples may provide some help:</p><p>Example 1: allow all IPs in 150.203.*.*; except one</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66</code></p><p>Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0</code></p><p>Example 3: allow a couple of hosts</p><p><code class="literal">hosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur</code></p><p>Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but @@ -2289,165 +2313,163 @@ hosts allow (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537514"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543629"></a> <a name="DENYHOSTS"></a>deny hosts -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537515"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSDENY">hosts deny</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537545"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543630"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#HOSTSDENY">hosts deny</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543660"></a> hosts deny (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537546"></a><a name="HOSTSDENY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The opposite of <em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543661"></a><a name="HOSTSDENY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The opposite of <em class="parameter"><code>hosts allow</code></em> - hosts listed here are <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override this one. Where the lists conflict, the <em class="parameter"><code>allow</code></em> list takes precedence.</p><p> In the event that it is necessary to deny all by default, use the keyword ALL (or the netmask <code class="literal">0.0.0.0/0</code>) and then explicitly specify - to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTSALLOW">hosts allow = hosts allow</a> parameter those hosts + to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTSALLOW" target="_top">hosts allow = hosts allow</a> parameter those hosts that should be permitted access. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts deny</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # none (i.e., no hosts specifically excluded)</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>hosts deny</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537647"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543762"></a> idmap alloc backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537648"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543763"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap alloc backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use - when allocating Unix uids/gids for Windows SIDs. This option is - to be used in conjunction with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> - parameter and refers to the name of the idmap module which will provide - the id allocation functionality. Please refer to the man page - for each idmap plugin to determine whether or not the module implements - the allocation feature. The most common plugins are the tdb (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>) - and ldap (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>) libraries. - </p><p>Also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCCONFIG">idmap alloc config</a> option. + when allocating Unix uids/gids for Windows SIDs. This option refers + to the name of the idmap module which will provide the id allocation + functionality. Please refer to the man page for each idmap plugin to + determine whether or not the module implements the allocation feature. + The most common plugins are the tdb (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>) + and ldap (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>) libraries. + </p><p> + This parameter defaults to the value <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND" target="_top">idmap backend</a> was set to, so by default winbind will allocate Unix IDs + from the default backend. You will only need to set this parameter + explicitly if you have an external source for Unix IDs, like a central + database service somewhere in your company. + </p><p> + Also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCCONFIG" target="_top">idmap alloc config</a> option. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap alloc backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537745"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543867"></a> idmap alloc config (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537746"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543868"></a><a name="IDMAPALLOCCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap alloc config prefix provides a means of managing settings - for the backend defined by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCBACKEND">idmap alloc backend</a> + for the backend defined by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCBACKEND" target="_top">idmap alloc backend</a> parameter. Refer to the man page for each idmap plugin regarding specific configuration details. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537789"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543912"></a> idmap backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537790"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543913"></a><a name="IDMAPBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap backend provides a plugin interface for Winbind to use - varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables. This - option is mutually exclusive with the newer and more flexible - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> parameter. The main difference - between the "idmap backend" and the "idmap domains" - is that the former only allows one backend for all domains while the - latter supports configuring backends on a per domain basis. + varying backends to store SID/uid/gid mapping tables. + </p><p> + This option specifies the default backend that is used when no special + configuration set by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> matches the + specific request. + </p><p> + This default backend also specifies the place where winbind-generated + idmap entries will be stored. So it is highly recommended that you + specify a writable backend like <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> or <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a> as the idmap backend. The <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_rid.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_rid</span>(8)</span></a> and <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> backends are not writable and thus will generate + unexpected results if set as idmap backend. + </p><p> + To use the rid and ad backends, please specify them via the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> parameter, possibly also for the + domain your machine is member of, specified by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a>. </p><p>Examples of SID/uid/gid backends include tdb (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>), ldap (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ldap.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ldap</span>(8)</span></a>), rid (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_rid.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_rid</span>(8)</span></a>), - and ad (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a>). + and ad (<a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a>). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">tdb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537884"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544084"></a> idmap cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537885"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544085"></a><a name="IDMAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's idmap interface will cache positive SID/uid/gid query results. - </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">900</code> + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800 (one week)</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2537927"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544128"></a> idmap config (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2537928"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The idmap config prefix provides a means of managing each domain - defined by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> option using Samba's - parametric option support. The idmap config prefix should be - followed by the name of the domain, a colon, and a setting specific to - the chosen backend. There are three options available for all domains: +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544129"></a><a name="IDMAPCONFIG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + The idmap config prefix provides a means of managing each trusted + domain separately. The idmap config prefix should be followed by the + name of the domain, a colon, and a setting specific to the chosen + backend. There are three options available for all domains: </p><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt><span class="term">backend = backend_name</span></dt><dd><p> Specifies the name of the idmap plugin to use as the SID/uid/gid backend for this domain. - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">default = [yes|no]</span></dt><dd><p> - The default domain/backend will be used for searching for - users and groups not belonging to one of the explicitly - listed domains (matched by comparing the account SID and the - domain SID). - </p></dd><dt><span class="term">readonly = [yes|no]</span></dt><dd><p> - Mark the domain as readonly which means that no attempts to - allocate a uid or gid (by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPALLOCBACKEND">idmap alloc backend</a>) for any user or group in that domain - will be attempted. + </p></dd><dt><span class="term">range = low - high</span></dt><dd><p> + Defines the available matching uid and gid range for which the + backend is authoritative. Note that the range commonly + matches the allocation range due to the fact that the same + backend will store and retrieve SID/uid/gid mapping entries. + </p><p> + winbind uses this parameter to find the backend that is + authoritative for a unix ID to SID mapping, so it must be set + for each individually configured domain, and it must be + disjoint from the ranges set via <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPUID" target="_top">idmap uid</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPGID" target="_top">idmap gid</a>. </p></dd></dl></div><p> - The following example illustrates how to configure the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> - for the CORP domain and the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> backend for all other domains. The - TRUSTEDDOMAINS string is simply an arbitrary key used to reference the "idmap - config" settings and does not represent the actual name of a domain. - It is a catchall domain backend for any domain not explicitly listed. + The following example illustrates how to configure the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_ad.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_ad</span>(8)</span></a> for the CORP domain and the + <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_tdb.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_tdb</span>(8)</span></a> backend for all other + domains. This configuration assumes that the admin of CORP assigns + unix ids below 1000000 via the SFU extensions, and winbind is supposed + to use the next million entries for its own mappings from trusted + domains and for local groups for example. </p><pre class="programlisting"> - idmap domains = CORP TRUSTEDDOMAINS + idmap backend = tdb + idmap uid = 1000000-1999999 + idmap gid = 1000000-1999999 - idmap config CORP:backend = ad - idmap config CORP:readonly = yes - - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:backend = tdb - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:default = yes - idmap config TRUSTEDDOMAINS:range = 1000 - 9999 - </pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538063"></a> - -idmap domains (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538064"></a><a name="IDMAPDOMAINS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The idmap domains option defines a list of Windows domains which will each - have a separately configured backend for managing Winbind's SID/uid/gid - tables. This parameter is mutually exclusive with the older <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a> option. - </p><p> - Values consist of the short domain name for Winbind's primary or collection - of trusted domains. You may also use an arbitrary string to represent a catchall - domain backend for any domain not explicitly listed. - </p><p> - Refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> for details about - managing the SID/uid/gid backend for each domain. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap domains</code></em> = <code class="literal">default AD CORP</code> -</em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538148"></a> + idmap config CORP : backend = ad + idmap config CORP : range = 1000-999999 + </pre><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544261"></a> <a name="WINBINDGID"></a>winbind gid -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538149"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538179"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544262"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPGID">idmap gid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544292"></a> idmap gid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538180"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544293"></a><a name="IDMAPGID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can - occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> options. + occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND" target="_top">idmap backend</a>, and + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> options. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap gid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538278"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544379"></a> idmap negative cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538279"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544380"></a><a name="IDMAPNEGATIVECACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds that Winbind's idmap interface will cache negative SID/uid/gid query results. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap negative cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538321"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544423"></a> <a name="WINBINDUID"></a>winbind uid -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538322"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538353"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544424"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#IDMAPUID">idmap uid</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544454"></a> idmap uid (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538354"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544455"></a><a name="IDMAPUID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs. This range of ids should have no existing local - or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND">idmap backend</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG">idmap config</a> options. + or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPBACKEND" target="_top">idmap backend</a> and + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPCONFIG" target="_top">idmap config</a> options. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>idmap uid</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000-20000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538450"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544540"></a> include (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538451"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544541"></a><a name="INCLUDE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This allows you to include one config file inside another. The file is included literally, as though typed in place. </p><p> @@ -2465,10 +2487,10 @@ include (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>include</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538551"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544641"></a> inherit acls (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538552"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544642"></a><a name="INHERITACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a new file or subdirectory in these parent directories. The default behavior is to use the unix mode specified when creating the directory. @@ -2476,10 +2498,10 @@ inherit acls (S) default directory acls are propagated. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538598"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544688"></a> inherit owner (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538599"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544689"></a><a name="INHERITOWNER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The ownership of new files and directories is normally governed by effective uid of the connected user. This option allows the Samba administrator to specify that the ownership for new files and directories should be controlled @@ -2488,25 +2510,48 @@ inherit owner (S) delete them and to ensure that newly create files in a user's roaming profile directory are actually owner by the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit owner</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538651"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544741"></a> inherit permissions (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538652"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a>, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK">directory mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE">force create mode</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE">force directory mode</a> but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544742"></a><a name="INHERITPERMISSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a>, + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DIRECTORYMASK" target="_top">directory mask</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE" target="_top">force create mode</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCEDIRECTORYMODE" target="_top">force directory mode</a> but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this. </p><p>New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, including bits such as setgid.</p><p> New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory. Their execute bits continue to be - determined by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPARCHIVE">map archive</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPSYSTEM">map system</a> as usual. + determined by <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPARCHIVE" target="_top">map archive</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPSYSTEM" target="_top">map system</a> as usual. </p><p>Note that the setuid bit is <span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span> set via inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this).</p><p>This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>inherit permissions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538799"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544890"></a> + +init logon delayed hosts (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544891"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter takes a list of host names, addresses or networks for + which the initial samlogon reply should be delayed (so other DCs get + preferred by XP workstations if there are any). + </p><p> + The length of the delay can be specified with the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAY" target="_top">init logon delay</a> parameter. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> +</em></span> +</p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delayed hosts</code></em> = <code class="literal">150.203.5. myhost.mynet.de</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544968"></a> + +init logon delay (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544969"></a><a name="INITLOGONDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter specifies a delay in milliseconds for the hosts configured + for delayed initial samlogon with + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INITLOGONDELAYEDHOSTS" target="_top">init logon delayed hosts</a>. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>init logon delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545023"></a> interfaces (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538800"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545024"></a><a name="INTERFACES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NBT) traffic. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any @@ -2530,10 +2575,10 @@ interfaces (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>interfaces</code></em> = <code class="literal">eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2538915"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545140"></a> invalid users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2538916"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545141"></a><a name="INVALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service. This is really a <span class="emphasis"><em>paranoid</em></span> check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security.</p><p>A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS @@ -2553,11 +2598,11 @@ invalid users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">root fred admin @wheel</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539029"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545254"></a> iprint server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539030"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">iprint</code>. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545255"></a><a name="IPRINTSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter is only applicable if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> is set to <code class="constant">iprint</code>. </p><p> If set, this option overrides the ServerName option in the CUPS <code class="filename">client.conf</code>. This is necessary if you have virtual samba servers that connect to different CUPS daemons. @@ -2565,33 +2610,33 @@ iprint server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>iprint server</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYCUPSSERVER</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539115"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545341"></a> keepalive (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539116"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545342"></a><a name="KEEPALIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between <em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> packets. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether a client is still present and responding.</p><p>Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket - has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default. (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETOPTIONS">socket options</a>). + has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it by default. (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SOCKETOPTIONS" target="_top">socket options</a>). Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> = <code class="literal">300</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>keepalive</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539202"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545428"></a> kernel change notify (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539203"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545429"></a><a name="KERNELCHANGENOTIFY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes. </p><p>This parameter is only used when your kernel supports change notification to user programs using the inotify interface. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel change notify</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539252"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545478"></a> kernel oplocks (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539253"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545479"></a><a name="KERNELOPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>For UNIXes that support kernel based <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off.</p><p>Kernel oplocks support allows Samba <em class="parameter"><code>oplocks </code></em> to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation @@ -2601,10 +2646,10 @@ kernel oplocks (G) to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support. You should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>kernel oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539339"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545567"></a> lanman auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539340"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545568"></a><a name="LANMANAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate users or permit password changes using the LANMAN password hash. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, but not @@ -2621,10 +2666,10 @@ lanman auth (G) permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lanman auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539432"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545659"></a> large readwrite (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539433"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545660"></a><a name="LARGEREADWRITE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs @@ -2633,36 +2678,36 @@ large readwrite (G) performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients. Defaults to on. Not as tested as some other Samba code paths.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>large readwrite</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539488"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545716"></a> ldap admin dn (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539489"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a> defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact - the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a> is used +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545717"></a><a name="LDAPADMINDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact + the ldap server when retreiving user account information. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb</code> file. See the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information on how to accomplish this. </p><p> - The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a> requires a fully specified DN. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> is not appended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN">ldap admin dn</a>. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539597"></a> + The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a> requires a fully specified DN. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> is not appended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN" target="_top">ldap admin dn</a>. + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545825"></a> ldap connection timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539598"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545826"></a><a name="LDAPCONNECTIONTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter tells the LDAP library calls which timeout in seconds they should honor during initial connection establishments to LDAP servers. It is very useful in failover scenarios in particular. If one or more LDAP servers are not reachable at all, we do not have to wait until TCP timeouts are over. This feature must be supported by your LDAP library. </p><p> - This parameter is different from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPTIMEOUT">ldap timeout</a> + This parameter is different from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPTIMEOUT" target="_top">ldap timeout</a> which affects operations on LDAP servers using an existing connection and not establishing an initial connection. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap connection timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539662"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545890"></a> ldap debug level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539663"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545891"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls the debug level of the LDAP library calls. In the case of OpenLDAP, it is the same bit-field as understood by the server and documented in the @@ -2679,10 +2724,10 @@ ldap debug level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug level</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539750"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545978"></a> ldap debug threshold (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539751"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545979"></a><a name="LDAPDEBUGTHRESHOLD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls the Samba debug level at which the ldap library debug output is printed in the Samba logs. See the description of @@ -2691,64 +2736,64 @@ ldap debug threshold (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap debug threshold</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539817"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546046"></a> ldap delete dn (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539818"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546047"></a><a name="LDAPDELETEDN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap delete dn</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539860"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546090"></a> ldap group suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539861"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546091"></a><a name="LDAPGROUPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory. - If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> + If this parameter is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap group suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Groups</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2539944"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546173"></a> ldap idmap suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2539945"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546174"></a><a name="LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings. If this parameter - is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix - string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. + is unset, the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix + string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap idmap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap idmap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Idmap</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540026"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546256"></a> ldap machine suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540027"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546257"></a><a name="LDAPMACHINESUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree. If this parameter is unset, the value of - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix string is pre-pended to the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap machine suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap machine suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=Computers</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540108"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546338"></a> ldap passwd sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540109"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546339"></a><a name="LDAPPASSWDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA. </p><p> - The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPPASSWDSYNC">ldap passwd sync</a> can be set to one of three values: + The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPPASSWDSYNC" target="_top">ldap passwd sync</a> can be set to one of three values: </p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Yes</code></em> = Try to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>No</code></em> = Update NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Only</code></em> = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest.</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap passwd sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540208"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546439"></a> ldap replication sleep (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540210"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546440"></a><a name="LDAPREPLICATIONSLEEP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> When Samba is asked to write to a read-only LDAP replica, we are redirected to talk to the read-write master server. This server then replicates our changes back to the 'local' server, however the replication might take some seconds, especially over slow links. Certain client activities, particularly domain joins, can become confused by the 'success' @@ -2761,10 +2806,10 @@ ldap replication sleep (G) The value is specified in milliseconds, the maximum value is 5000 (5 seconds). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap replication sleep</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540272"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546503"></a> ldapsam:editposix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540273"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546504"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Editposix is an option that leverages ldapsam:trusted to make it simpler to manage a domain controller eliminating the need to set up custom scripts to add and manage the posix users and groups. This option will instead directly manipulate the ldap tree to create, remove and modify user and group entries. @@ -2777,8 +2822,8 @@ ldapsam:editposix (G) provision</code>. To run this command the ldap server must be running, Winindd must be running and the smb.conf ldap options must be properly configured. - The typical ldap setup used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> option - is usually sufficient to use <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX">ldapsam:editposix = yes</a> as well. + The typical ldap setup used with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED" target="_top">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> option + is usually sufficient to use <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:EDITPOSIX" target="_top">ldapsam:editposix = yes</a> as well. </p><p> An example configuration can be the following: @@ -2842,10 +2887,10 @@ ldapsam:editposix (G) </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:editposix</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540409"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546637"></a> ldapsam:trusted (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540410"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546638"></a><a name="LDAPSAM:TRUSTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> By default, Samba as a Domain Controller with an LDAP backend needs to use the Unix-style NSS subsystem to access user and group information. Due to the way Unix stores user information in /etc/passwd and /etc/group this inevitably leads to inefficiencies. One important question a user needs to know is the list of groups he @@ -2853,69 +2898,69 @@ ldapsam:trusted (G) counterparts in LDAP. UNIX has optimized functions to enumerate group membership. Sadly, other functions that are used to deal with user and group attributes lack such optimization. </p><p> - To make Samba scale well in large environments, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> + To make Samba scale well in large environments, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED" target="_top">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> option assumes that the complete user and group database that is relevant to Samba is stored in LDAP with the standard posixAccount/posixGroup attributes. It further assumes that the Samba auxiliary object classes are stored together with the POSIX data in the same LDAP object. If these assumptions are met, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> can be activated and Samba can bypass the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSAM:TRUSTED" target="_top">ldapsam:trusted = yes</a> can be activated and Samba can bypass the NSS system to query user group memberships. Optimized LDAP queries can greatly speed up domain logon and administration tasks. Depending on the size of the LDAP database a factor of 100 or more for common queries is easily achieved. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldapsam:trusted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540498"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546726"></a> ldap ssl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540499"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546727"></a><a name="LDAPSSL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is <span class="emphasis"><em>NOT</em></span> related to - Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the - <code class="literal">--with-ssl</code> option to the <code class="filename">configure</code> - script.</p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL">ldap ssl</a> can be set to one of three values:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Off</code></em> = Never - use SSL when querying the directory.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Start_tls</code></em> = Use - the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for - communicating with the directory server.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>On</code></em> = Use SSL - on the ldaps port when contacting the <em class="parameter"><code>ldap server</code></em>. Only available when the - backwards-compatiblity <code class="literal">--with-ldapsam</code> option is specified - to configure. See <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSDBBACKEND">passdb backend</a></p>. - </li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl</code></em> = <code class="literal">start_tls</code> -</em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540637"></a> + Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the + <code class="literal">--with-ssl</code> option to the + <code class="filename">configure</code> + script.</p><p>LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be + done setting either this parameter to + <em class="parameter"><code>Start_tls</code></em> + or by specifying <em class="parameter"><code>ldaps://</code></em> in + the URL argument of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSDBBACKEND" target="_top">passdb backend</a>.</p><p>The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a> can be set to one of + two values:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>Off</code></em> = Never + use SSL when querying the directory.</p></li><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>start tls</code></em> = Use + the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for + communicating with the directory server.</p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap ssl</code></em> = <code class="literal">start tls</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546858"></a> ldap suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540638"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p> - The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPUSERSUFFIX">ldap user suffix</a>, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPGROUPSUFFIX">ldap group suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPMACHINESUFFIX">ldap machine suffix</a>, and the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX">ldap idmap suffix</a>. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a>. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546859"></a><a name="LDAPSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the base for all ldap suffixes and for storing the sambaDomain object.</p><p> + The ldap suffix will be appended to the values specified for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPUSERSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap user suffix</a>, + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPGROUPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap group suffix</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPMACHINESUFFIX" target="_top">ldap machine suffix</a>, and the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPIDMAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap idmap suffix</a>. Each of these should be given only a DN relative to the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">dc=samba,dc=org</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540760"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546980"></a> ldap timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540761"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - When Samba connects to an ldap server that server may be down or unreachable. To prevent Samba from hanging whilst - waiting for the connection this parameter specifies in seconds how long Samba should wait before failing the - connect. The default is to only wait fifteen seconds for the ldap server to respond to the connect request. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546981"></a><a name="LDAPTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter defines the number of seconds that Samba should use as timeout for LDAP operations. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">15</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540806"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547023"></a> ldap user suffix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540807"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547024"></a><a name="LDAPUSERSUFFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree. If this parameter is unset, - the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix - string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. + the value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> will be used instead. The suffix + string is pre-pended to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSUFFIX" target="_top">ldap suffix</a> string so use a partial DN. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap user suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ldap user suffix</code></em> = <code class="literal">ou=people</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540888"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547104"></a> level2 oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540889"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547106"></a><a name="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share.</p><p>Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead @@ -2929,16 +2974,16 @@ level2 oplocks (S) or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any read-ahead caches.</p><p>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access to shared executables.</p><p>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</p><p> - Currently, if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS">kernel oplocks</a> are supported then + Currently, if <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS" target="_top">kernel oplocks</a> are supported then level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set to - <code class="constant">yes</code>). Note also, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> + <code class="constant">yes</code>). Note also, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> parameter must be set to <code class="constant">yes</code> on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>level2 oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2540995"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547211"></a> lm announce (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2540996"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547212"></a><a name="LMANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list. This parameter can have three values, <code class="constant">yes</code>, <code class="constant">no</code>, or @@ -2946,39 +2991,39 @@ lm announce (G) If set to <code class="constant">no</code> Samba will never produce these broadcasts. If set to <code class="constant">yes</code> Samba will produce Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMINTERVAL">lm interval</a>. If set to <code class="constant">auto</code> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMINTERVAL" target="_top">lm interval</a>. If set to <code class="constant">auto</code> Samba will not send Lanman announce broadcasts by default but will listen for them. If it hears such a broadcast on the wire it will then start sending them at a frequency set by the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMINTERVAL">lm interval</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMINTERVAL" target="_top">lm interval</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm announce</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541117"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547333"></a> lm interval (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541118"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547334"></a><a name="LMINTERVAL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE">lm announce</a> parameter) then this + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE" target="_top">lm announce</a> parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be made. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be - made despite the setting of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE">lm announce</a> + made despite the setting of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LMANNOUNCE" target="_top">lm announce</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm interval</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lm interval</code></em> = <code class="literal">120</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541201"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547418"></a> load printers (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541202"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547419"></a><a name="LOADPRINTERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default. - See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERS">printers</a> section for + See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERS" target="_top">printers</a> section for more details.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>load printers</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541258"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547474"></a> local master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541259"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547475"></a><a name="LOCALMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to try and become a local master browser on a subnet. If set to <code class="constant">no</code> then <code class="literal"> nmbd</code> will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections. By @@ -2988,15 +3033,15 @@ local master (G) will <span class="emphasis"><em>participate</em></span> in elections for local master browser.</p><p>Setting this value to <code class="constant">no</code> will cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> <span class="emphasis"><em>never</em></span> to become a local master browser.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>local master</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541358"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547574"></a> <a name="LOCKDIR"></a>lock dir -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541359"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541390"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547575"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547606"></a> lock directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541391"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547607"></a><a name="LOCKDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed. The lock files are used to implement the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXCONNECTIONS">max connections</a> option. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXCONNECTIONS" target="_top">max connections</a> option. </p><p> Note: This option can not be set inside registry configurations. @@ -3004,10 +3049,10 @@ lock directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/samba/locks</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541468"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547684"></a> locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541470"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547686"></a><a name="LOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client.</p><p>If <code class="literal">locking = no</code>, all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report @@ -3017,41 +3062,41 @@ locking (S) CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of <code class="constant">no</code> is not really recommended even in this case.</p><p>Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption. - You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541544"></a> + You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547760"></a> lock spin count (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541545"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547761"></a><a name="LOCKSPINCOUNT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter has been made inoperative in Samba 3.0.24. The functionality it contolled is now controlled by the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINTIME">lock spin time</a>. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINTIME" target="_top">lock spin time</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin count</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541600"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547816"></a> lock spin time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541601"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in microseconds that smbd should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547817"></a><a name="LOCKSPINTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The time in microseconds that smbd should keep waiting to see if a failed lock request can be granted. This parameter has changed in default value from Samba 3.0.23 from 10 to 200. The associated - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINCOUNT">lock spin count</a> parameter is + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKSPINCOUNT" target="_top">lock spin count</a> parameter is no longer used in Samba 3.0.24. You should not need to change the value of this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lock spin time</code></em> = <code class="literal">200</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541659"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547874"></a> log file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541660"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547875"></a><a name="LOGFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file). </p><p> This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log file</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/var/log.%m</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541711"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547926"></a> <a name="DEBUGLEVEL"></a>debuglevel -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541712"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541742"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547927"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#LOGLEVEL">log level</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547957"></a> log level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541743"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547958"></a><a name="LOGLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the <code class="filename">smb.conf</code> file. </p><p>This parameter has been extended since the 2.2.x @@ -3062,12 +3107,12 @@ log level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>log level</code></em> = <code class="literal">3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2541975"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548191"></a> logon drive (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2541976"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548192"></a><a name="LOGONDRIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be - connected (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME">logon home</a>) and is only used by NT + connected (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home</a>) and is only used by NT Workstations. </p><p> Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server. @@ -3075,10 +3120,10 @@ logon drive (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon drive</code></em> = <code class="literal">h:</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542049"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548266"></a> logon home (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542050"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548267"></a><a name="LOGONHOME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC. It allows you to do </p><p> @@ -3097,26 +3142,26 @@ logon home (G) in a NetUserGetInfo request. Win9X clients truncate the info to \\server\share when a user does <code class="literal">net use /home</code> but use the whole string when dealing with profiles. </p><p> - Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH">logon path</a> was returned rather than + Note that in prior versions of Samba, the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH" target="_top">logon path</a> was returned rather than <em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em>. This broke <code class="literal">net use /home</code> but allowed profiles outside the home directory. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for profiles if you use the above trick. </p><p> - Disable this feature by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME">logon home = ""</a> - using the empty string. + Disable this feature by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home = ""</a> - using the empty string. </p><p> This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\%N\%U</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon home</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\remote_smb_server\%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542214"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548431"></a> logon path (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542215"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548432"></a><a name="LOGONPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the directory where roaming profiles (Desktop, NTuser.dat, etc) are stored. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME">logon home</a> parameter. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONHOME" target="_top">logon home</a> parameter. </p><p> This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine. It also specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", <code class="filename">desktop</code>, <code class="filename">start menu</code>, <code class="filename">network neighborhood</code>, <code class="filename">programs</code> and other @@ -3145,7 +3190,7 @@ logon path (G) provided system tool). </p></div><p>Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a domain controller.</p><p> Disable the use of roaming profiles by setting the value of this parameter to the empty string. For - example, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH">logon path = ""</a>. Take note that even if the default setting + example, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONPATH" target="_top">logon path = ""</a>. Take note that even if the default setting in the smb.conf file is the empty string, any value specified in the user account settings in the passdb backend will over-ride the effect of setting this parameter to null. Disabling of all roaming profile use requires that the user account settings must also be blank. @@ -3156,16 +3201,16 @@ logon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon path</code></em> = <code class="literal">\\%N\%U\profile</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542382"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548599"></a> logon script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542383"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548600"></a><a name="LOGONSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the batch file (<code class="filename">.bat</code>) or NT command file (<code class="filename">.cmd</code>) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended. </p><p> The script must be a relative path to the <em class="parameter"><code>[netlogon]</code></em> service. If the [netlogon] - service specifies a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH">path</a> of <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/netlogon</code>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT">logon script = STARTUP.BAT</a>, then the file that will be downloaded is: + service specifies a <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PATH" target="_top">path</a> of <code class="filename">/usr/local/samba/netlogon</code>, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOGONSCRIPT" target="_top">logon script = STARTUP.BAT</a>, then the file that will be downloaded is: </p><pre class="programlisting"> /usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP.BAT </pre><p> @@ -3190,10 +3235,10 @@ logon script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>logon script</code></em> = <code class="literal">scripts\%U.bat</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542552"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548769"></a> lppause command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542553"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548770"></a><a name="LPPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to pause the print job. One way @@ -3208,7 +3253,7 @@ lppause command (S) will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status.</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lppause command</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # Currently no default value is given to - this string, unless the value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> + this string, unless the value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> parameter is <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, in which case the default is : <code class="literal">lp -i %p-%j -H hold</code> or if the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter is @@ -3217,10 +3262,10 @@ lppause command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lppause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542699"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548917"></a> lpq cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542700"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548918"></a><a name="LPQCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the <code class="literal">lpq</code> command being called too often. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the <code class="literal"> lpq</code> command used by the system, so if you use different @@ -3233,10 +3278,10 @@ lpq cache time (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542819"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549036"></a> lpq command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542820"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549037"></a><a name="LPQCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain <code class="literal">lpq </code>-style printer status information.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer @@ -3258,26 +3303,26 @@ lpq command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpq -P%p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2542945"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549162"></a> lpresume command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2542946"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549163"></a><a name="LPRESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job. See - also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LPPAUSECOMMAND">lppause command</a> parameter.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name + also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LPPAUSECOMMAND" target="_top">lppause command</a> parameter.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with the job number (an integer).</p><p>Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the <em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em> as the PATH may not - be available to the server.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: Currently no default value is given + be available to the server.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter is <code class="constant">SYSV</code>, in which case the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">lp -i %p-%j -H resume</code></p><p>or if the value of the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> parameter is <code class="constant">SOFTQ</code>, then the default is:</p><p><code class="literal">qstat -s -j%j -r</code></p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543098"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549315"></a> lprm command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543099"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549316"></a><a name="LPRMCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job.</p><p>If a <em class="parameter"><code>%p</code></em> is given then the printer name is put in its place. A <em class="parameter"><code>%j</code></em> is replaced with @@ -3294,41 +3339,41 @@ lprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> = <code class="literal"> determined by printing parameter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543185"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549402"></a> machine password timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543186"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = domain</a> parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549403"></a><a name="MACHINEPASSWORDTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called <code class="filename">private/secrets.tdb </code>. This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server. </p><p> See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, - and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = domain</a> parameter. + and the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>machine password timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">604800</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543272"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549490"></a> magic output (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543273"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549491"></a><a name="MAGICOUTPUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICSCRIPT">magic script</a> parameter below). + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICSCRIPT" target="_top">magic script</a> parameter below). </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>If two clients use the same <em class="parameter"><code>magic script </code></em> in the same directory the output file content is undefined. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal"><magic script name>.out</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic output</code></em> = <code class="literal">myfile.txt</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543356"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549574"></a> magic script (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543357"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549575"></a><a name="MAGICSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user.</p><p>Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion.</p><p>If the script generates output, output will be sent to - the file specified by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICOUTPUT">magic output</a> + the file specified by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAGICOUTPUT" target="_top">magic output</a> parameter (see above).</p><p>Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing CR/LF instead of CR as the end-of-line marker. Magic scripts must be executable @@ -3338,12 +3383,12 @@ magic script (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>magic script</code></em> = <code class="literal">user.csh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543462"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549680"></a> mangled names (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543463"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549681"></a><a name="MANGLEDNAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, - or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING">name mangling</a> for + or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored.</p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a> for details on how to control the mangling process.</p><p>If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters @@ -3353,7 +3398,7 @@ mangled names (S) extension). The final extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three characters.</p><p>Note that the character to use may be specified using - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MANGLINGCHAR">mangling char</a> + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MANGLINGCHAR" target="_top">mangling char</a> option, if you don't like '~'.</p></li><li><p>Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden files. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as @@ -3366,10 +3411,10 @@ mangled names (S) from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename. Mangled names do not change between sessions.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangled names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543598"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549817"></a> mangle prefix (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543599"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549818"></a><a name="MANGLEPREFIX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions. The minimum @@ -3379,20 +3424,20 @@ mangle prefix (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangle prefix</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543665"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549883"></a> mangling char (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543666"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as - the <span class="emphasis"><em>magic</em></span> character in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING">name mangling</a>. The +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549884"></a><a name="MANGLINGCHAR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what character is used as + the <span class="emphasis"><em>magic</em></span> character in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMEMANGLING" target="_top">name mangling</a>. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer. This is effective only when mangling method is hash.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">~</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling char</code></em> = <code class="literal">^</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543742"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549961"></a> mangling method (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543743"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549962"></a><a name="MANGLINGMETHOD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2". "hash" is the algorithm that was used used in Samba for many years and was the default in Samba 2.2.x "hash2" is @@ -3403,10 +3448,10 @@ mangling method (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>mangling method</code></em> = <code class="literal">hash</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543809"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550028"></a> map acl inherit (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543810"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550029"></a><a name="MAPACLINHERIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user.SAMBA_PAI. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and @@ -3414,10 +3459,10 @@ map acl inherit (S) POSIX ACL mapping code. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map acl inherit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543866"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550085"></a> map archive (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543867"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550086"></a><a name="MAPARCHIVE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup. One @@ -3425,29 +3470,29 @@ map archive (S) any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX. This can be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc... </p><p> - Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> parameter to be set such that owner + Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 100). See the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> for details. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map archive</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543941"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550160"></a> map hidden (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2543942"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550162"></a><a name="MAPHIDDEN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit. </p><p> - Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> to be set such that the world execute - bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> + Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> to be set such that the world execute + bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 001). See the parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details. - </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2543999"></a> + </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550218"></a> map read only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544000"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550219"></a><a name="MAPREADONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls how the DOS read only attribute should be mapped from a UNIX filesystem. </p><p> This parameter can take three different values, which tell <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> how to display the read only attribute on files, where either - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">No</code>, or no extended attribute is - present. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then this + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">No</code>, or no extended attribute is + present. If <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then this parameter is <span class="emphasis"><em>ignored</em></span>. This is a new parameter introduced in Samba version 3.0.21. </p><p>The three settings are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p> <code class="constant">Yes</code> - The read only DOS attribute is mapped to the inverse of the user @@ -3464,24 +3509,24 @@ map read only (S) is reported as being set on the file. </p></li><li><p> <code class="constant">No</code> - The read only DOS attribute is unaffected by permissions, and can only be set by - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES">store dos attributes</a> method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs. + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#STOREDOSATTRIBUTES" target="_top">store dos attributes</a> method. This may be useful for exporting mounted CDs. </p></li></ul></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544164"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550375"></a> map system (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544165"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550376"></a><a name="MAPSYSTEM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit. </p><p> - Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> to be set such that the group + Note that this requires the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i.e. it must include 010). See the parameter - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK">create mask</a> for details. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK" target="_top">create mask</a> for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map system</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544233"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550444"></a> map to guest (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544234"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">SECURITY = +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550445"></a><a name="MAPTOGUEST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">SECURITY = security</a> modes other than <em class="parameter"><code>security = share</code></em> and <em class="parameter"><code>security = server</code></em> - i.e. <code class="constant">user</code>, and <code class="constant">domain</code>.</p><p>This parameter can take four different values, which tell @@ -3491,9 +3536,9 @@ map to guest (G) default.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">Bad User</code> - Means user logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and - mapped into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a>.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">Bad Password</code> - Means user logins + mapped into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">Bad Password</code> - Means user logins with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped - into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a>. Note that + into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and will not know the reason they cannot access files they think @@ -3523,21 +3568,21 @@ map to guest (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>map to guest</code></em> = <code class="literal">Bad User</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544473"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550684"></a> max connections (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544474"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550685"></a><a name="MAXCONNECTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited. If <em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made.</p><p>Record lock files are used to implement this feature. The lock files will be stored in - the directory specified by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKDIRECTORY">lock directory</a> option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> + the directory specified by the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOCKDIRECTORY" target="_top">lock directory</a> option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max connections</code></em> = <code class="literal">10</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544559"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550770"></a> max disk size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544560"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550771"></a><a name="MAXDISKSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in size.</p><p>Note that this option does not limit the amount of @@ -3551,10 +3596,10 @@ max disk size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max disk size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544650"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550862"></a> max log size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544651"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550863"></a><a name="MAXLOGSIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a <code class="filename">.old</code> extension. @@ -3563,17 +3608,17 @@ max log size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max log size</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544722"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550932"></a> max mux (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544723"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550933"></a><a name="MAXMUX"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow. You should never need to set this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max mux</code></em> = <code class="literal">50</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544765"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550975"></a> max open files (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544766"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550976"></a><a name="MAXOPENFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> file serving process may have open for a client at any one time. The default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses @@ -3581,23 +3626,23 @@ max open files (G) by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max open files</code></em> = <code class="literal">10000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544825"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551036"></a> max print jobs (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544826"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551037"></a><a name="MAXPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will remote "Out of Space" to the client. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">5000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544895"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551106"></a> <a name="PROTOCOL"></a>protocol -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544896"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2544927"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551107"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551139"></a> max protocol (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2544928"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551140"></a><a name="MAXPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server.</p><p>Possible values are :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><code class="constant">CORE</code>: Earliest version. No concept of user names.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">COREPLUS</code>: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">LANMAN1</code>: First <span class="emphasis"><em> @@ -3609,10 +3654,10 @@ max protocol (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">LANMAN1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545052"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551264"></a> max reported print jobs (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545053"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551265"></a><a name="MAXREPORTEDPRINTJOBS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment. If this number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of @@ -3621,10 +3666,10 @@ max reported print jobs (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max reported print jobs</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545116"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551332"></a> max smbd processes (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545117"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551334"></a><a name="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the maximum number of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each user will have an <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> associated with him or her to handle connections to all @@ -3632,10 +3677,10 @@ max smbd processes (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max smbd processes</code></em> = <code class="literal">1000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545197"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551414"></a> max stat cache size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545198"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551415"></a><a name="MAXSTATCACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter limits the size in memory of any <em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> being used to speed up case insensitive name mappings. It represents the number of kilobyte (1024) units the stat cache can use. @@ -3646,27 +3691,27 @@ max stat cache size (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max stat cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">100</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545267"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551483"></a> max ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545268"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551484"></a><a name="MAXTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when <code class="literal">nmbd</code> is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server. You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 3 days.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">259200</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545326"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551542"></a> max wins ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545327"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server - (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT">wins support = yes</a>) what the maximum +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551543"></a><a name="MAXWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when acting as a WINS server + (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT" target="_top">wins support = yes</a>) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">518400</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545397"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551614"></a> max xmit (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545398"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551615"></a><a name="MAXXMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba. The default is 16644, which matches the behavior of Windows 2000. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems. You should never need to change this parameter from its default value. @@ -3674,10 +3719,10 @@ max xmit (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>max xmit</code></em> = <code class="literal">8192</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545460"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551677"></a> message command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545461"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551678"></a><a name="MESSAGECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message.</p><p>This would normally be a command that would deliver the message somehow. How this is to be done is up to your imagination.</p><p>An example is: @@ -3716,35 +3761,35 @@ message command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>message command</code></em> = <code class="literal">csh -c 'xedit %s; rm %s' &</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545670"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551887"></a> min print space (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545671"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551888"></a><a name="MINPRINTSPACE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print job.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min print space</code></em> = <code class="literal">2000</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545732"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551949"></a> min protocol (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545733"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551950"></a><a name="MINPROTOCOL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer - to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXPROTOCOL">max protocol</a> + to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAXPROTOCOL" target="_top">max protocol</a> parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description of each. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in <code class="filename">source/smbd/negprot.c</code> for a listing of known protocol dialects supported by clients.</p><p>If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should - also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LANMANAUTH">lanman auth</a> parameter. Otherwise, you should never need + also refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LANMANAUTH" target="_top">lanman auth</a> parameter. Otherwise, you should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">CORE</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min protocol</code></em> = <code class="literal">NT1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545830"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552047"></a> min receivefile size (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545831"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552048"></a><a name="MINRECEIVEFILESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option changes the behavior of <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> when processing SMBwriteX calls. Any incoming SMBwriteX call on a non-signed SMB/CIFS connection greater than this value will not be processed in the normal way but will be passed to any underlying kernel recvfile or splice system call (if there is no such call Samba will emulate in user space). This allows zero-copy writes directly from network @@ -3753,30 +3798,30 @@ but user testing is recommended. If set to zero Samba processes SMBwriteX calls normal way. To enable POSIX large write support (SMB/CIFS writes up to 16Mb) this option must be nonzero. The maximum value is 128k. Values greater than 128k will be silently set to 128k.</p><p>Note this option will have NO EFFECT if set on a SMB signed connection.</p><p>The default is zero, which diables this option.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min receivefile size</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545900"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552117"></a> min wins ttl (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545901"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> - when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT">wins support = yes</a>) what the minimum 'time to live' +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552118"></a><a name="MINWINSTTL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option tells <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> + when acting as a WINS server (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT" target="_top">wins support = yes</a>) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will grant will be (in seconds). You should never need to change this parameter. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>min wins ttl</code></em> = <code class="literal">21600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2545970"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552187"></a> msdfs proxy (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2545971"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552188"></a><a name="MSDFSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using the SMB-Dfs protocol.</p><p>Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares. Take a look at the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT">msdfs root</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS">host msdfs</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT" target="_top">msdfs root</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS" target="_top">host msdfs</a> options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">\otherserver\someshare</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546048"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552265"></a> msdfs root (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546049"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552266"></a><a name="MSDFSROOT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic @@ -3784,20 +3829,20 @@ msdfs root (S) and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to the MSDFS chapter in the Samba3-HOWTO book.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>msdfs root</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546103"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552320"></a> name cache timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546104"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552322"></a><a name="NAMECACHETIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out. If the timeout is set to 0. the caching is disabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">660</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name cache timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546164"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552382"></a> name resolve order (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546166"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552383"></a><a name="NAMERESOLVEORDER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name resolution is performed. The option takes a space @@ -3815,9 +3860,9 @@ name resolve order (G) useful for active directory domains and results in a DNS query for the SRV RR entry matching _ldap._tcp.domain. </p></li><li><p><code class="constant">wins</code> : Query a name with - the IP address listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSERVER">WINSSERVER</a> parameter. If no WINS server has + the IP address listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSERVER" target="_top">WINSSERVER</a> parameter. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored.</p></li><li><p><code class="constant">bcast</code> : Do a broadcast on - each of the known local interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES">interfaces</a> + each of the known local interfaces listed in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES" target="_top">interfaces</a> parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet.</p></li></ul></div><p>The example below will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined @@ -3828,10 +3873,10 @@ name resolve order (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>name resolve order</code></em> = <code class="literal">lmhosts bcast host</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546366"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552584"></a> netbios aliases (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546367"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552585"></a><a name="NETBIOSALIASES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known. This allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names. If a machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon @@ -3841,10 +3886,10 @@ netbios aliases (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios aliases</code></em> = <code class="literal">TEST TEST1 TEST2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546431"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552650"></a> netbios name (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546432"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552651"></a><a name="NETBIOSNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known. By default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under. @@ -3857,17 +3902,17 @@ netbios name (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios name</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYNAME</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546513"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552731"></a> netbios scope (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546514"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552732"></a><a name="NETBIOSSCOPE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>netbios scope</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546556"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552774"></a> nis homedir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546557"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552775"></a><a name="NISHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Get the home share server from a NIS map. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote server. </p><p>When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory @@ -3881,25 +3926,25 @@ nis homedir (G) it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory server. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOMEDIRMAP">homedir map</a> and return the server + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#HOMEDIRMAP" target="_top">homedir map</a> and return the server listed there.</p><p>Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nis homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546636"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552854"></a> nt acl support (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546637"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552855"></a><a name="NTACLSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists. The UNIX permissions considered are the the traditional UNIX owner and group permissions, as well as POSIX ACLs set on any files or directories. This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to 2.2.2.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt acl support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546691"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552909"></a> ntlm auth (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546692"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552910"></a><a name="NTLMAUTH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines whether or not <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response. If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response will need to be sent by the client.</p><p>If this option, and <code class="literal">lanman @@ -3907,62 +3952,62 @@ ntlm auth (G) permited. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to use it.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>ntlm auth</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546755"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552973"></a> nt pipe support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546756"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552974"></a><a name="NTPIPESUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific <code class="constant">IPC$</code> pipes. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt pipe support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546811"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553029"></a> nt status support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546812"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553030"></a><a name="NTSTATUSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone. If this option is set to <code class="constant">no</code> then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2.2.3 reported.</p><p>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>nt status support</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546872"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553090"></a> null passwords (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546873"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553091"></a><a name="NULLPASSWORDS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords. </p><p>See also <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.5.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(5)</span></a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>null passwords</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546925"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553144"></a> obey pam restrictions (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546926"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553145"></a><a name="OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba 3.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i.e. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account and session management directives. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to ignore any account or session management. Note that Samba - always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords = yes</a>. The reason + always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords = yes</a>. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response authentication mechanism needed in the presence of SMB password encryption. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>obey pam restrictions</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2546989"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553208"></a> only user (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2546990"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553209"></a><a name="ONLYUSER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list will be allowed. By default this option is disabled so that a client can supply a username to be used by the server. Enabling this parameter will force the server to only use the login names from the <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list and is only really - useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = share</a> level security.</p><p>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce + useful in <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> level security.</p><p>Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the service name. This can be annoying for the [homes] section. To get around this you could use <code class="literal">user = %S</code> which means your <em class="parameter"><code>user</code></em> list will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>only user</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547078"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553297"></a> oplock break wait time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547079"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553298"></a><a name="OPLOCKBREAKWAITTIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can fail and not respond to the break request. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount @@ -3971,10 +4016,10 @@ oplock break wait time (G) DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock break wait time</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547133"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553352"></a> oplock contention limit (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547134"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553353"></a><a name="OPLOCKCONTENTIONLIMIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a <span class="emphasis"><em>very</em></span> advanced <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file. </p><p> @@ -3986,10 +4031,10 @@ oplock contention limit (S) DO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplock contention limit</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547215"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553434"></a> oplocks (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547216"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553436"></a><a name="OPLOCKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option tells <code class="literal">smbd</code> whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve @@ -4001,17 +4046,17 @@ oplocks (S) <code class="filename">docs/</code> directory. </p><p> Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a share. See - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOOPLOCKFILES">veto oplock files</a> parameter. On some systems + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOOPLOCKFILES" target="_top">veto oplock files</a> parameter. On some systems oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS">kernel oplocks</a> parameter for details. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#KERNELOPLOCKS" target="_top">kernel oplocks</a> parameter for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>oplocks</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547315"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553533"></a> os2 driver map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547316"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553534"></a><a name="OS2DRIVERMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names. The format is:</p><p><nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>.<device name></p><p>For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver would appear as <code class="literal">HP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP @@ -4021,12 +4066,12 @@ os2 driver map (G) details on OS/2 clients, please refer to chapter on other clients in the Samba3-HOWTO book. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os2 driver map</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547381"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553600"></a> os level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547382"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553601"></a><a name="OSLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections. The value of this - parameter determines whether <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> in the local broadcast area. + parameter determines whether <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> in the local broadcast area. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em> Note:</em></span> By default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can @@ -4040,31 +4085,31 @@ os level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>os level</code></em> = <code class="literal">65</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547490"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553700"></a> pam password change (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547491"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553701"></a><a name="PAMPASSWORDCHANGE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM">passwd program</a>. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM" target="_top">passwd program</a>. It should be possible to enable this without changing your - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDCHAT">passwd chat</a> parameter for most setups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pam password change</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDCHAT" target="_top">passwd chat</a> parameter for most setups.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pam password change</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547561"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553772"></a> panic action (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547562"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553774"></a><a name="PANICACTION"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> or <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> crashes. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>panic action</code></em> = <code class="literal">"/bin/sleep 90000"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547637"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553848"></a> paranoid server security (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547638"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553849"></a><a name="PARANOIDSERVERSECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some version of NT 4.x allow non-guest users with a bad passowrd. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4.x server as password server, but instead complain to the logs and exit. @@ -4072,10 +4117,10 @@ paranoid server security (G) this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a bad logon to the remote server.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>paranoid server security</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547688"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553900"></a> passdb backend (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547689"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553901"></a><a name="PASSDBBACKEND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows the administrator to chose which backend will be used for storing user and possibly group information. This allows you to swap between different storage mechanisms without recompile. </p><p>The parameter value is divided into two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' string that has meaning only to that particular backed. These are separated @@ -4084,10 +4129,10 @@ passdb backend (G) backend. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument. </p></li><li><p><code class="literal">tdbsam</code> - The TDB based password storage backend. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb.tdb - in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRIVATEDIR">private dir</a> directory.</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ldapsam</code> - The LDAP based passdb + in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRIVATEDIR" target="_top">private dir</a> directory.</p></li><li><p><code class="literal">ldapsam</code> - The LDAP based passdb backend. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to <code class="literal">ldap://localhost</code>)</p><p>LDAP connections should be secured where possible. This may be done using either - Start-TLS (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL">ldap ssl</a>) or by + Start-TLS (see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPSSL" target="_top">ldap ssl</a>) or by specifying <em class="parameter"><code>ldaps://</code></em> in the URL argument. </p><p>Multiple servers may also be specified in double-quotes. Whether multiple servers are supported or not and the exact @@ -4108,59 +4153,59 @@ or multi server LDAP URL with Netscape based LDAP library: passdb backend = ldapsam:"ldap://ldap-1.example.com ldap-2.example.com" </pre><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb backend</code></em> = <code class="literal">smbpasswd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547844"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554057"></a> passdb expand explicit (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547845"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554058"></a><a name="PASSDBEXPANDEXPLICIT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls whether Samba substitutes %-macros in the passdb fields if they are explicitly set. We used to expand macros here, but this turned out to be a bug because the Windows client can expand a variable %G_osver% in which %G would have been substituted by the user's primary group. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passdb expand explicit</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547891"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554104"></a> passwd chat debug (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547892"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554105"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATDEBUG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in <span class="emphasis"><em>debug</em></span> mode. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> log with a - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL">debug level</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEBUGLEVEL" target="_top">debug level</a> of 100. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the <code class="literal">smbd</code> log. It is available to help Samba admins debug their <em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> scripts when calling the <em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> and should be turned off after this has been done. This option has no effect if the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE">pam password change</a> + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" target="_top">pam password change</a> parameter is set. This parameter is off by default.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat debug</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2547994"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554207"></a> passwd chat timeout (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2547995"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554208"></a><a name="PASSWDCHATTIMEOUT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This integer specifies the number of seconds smbd will wait for an initial answer from a passwd chat script being run. Once the initial answer is received the subsequent answers must be received in one tenth of this time. The default it two seconds.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat timeout</code></em> = <code class="literal">2</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548039"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554252"></a> passwd chat (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548040"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554253"></a><a name="PASSWDCHAT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This string controls the <span class="emphasis"><em>"chat"</em></span> conversation that takes places between <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> and the local password changing program to change the user's password. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> uses to determine what to send to the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM">passwd program</a> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM" target="_top">passwd program</a> and what to expect back. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed.</p><p>This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS - etc).</p><p>Note that this parameter only is used if the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC">unix password sync</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. This sequence is + etc).</p><p>Note that this parameter only is used if the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UNIXPASSWORDSYNC" target="_top">unix password sync</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. This sequence is then called <span class="emphasis"><em>AS ROOT</em></span> when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password cleartext. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password without knowing the text of the previous password. In the presence of - NIS/YP, this means that the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM">passwd program</a> must + NIS/YP, this means that the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWDPROGRAM" target="_top">passwd program</a> must be executed on the NIS master. </p><p>The string can contain the macro <em class="parameter"><code>%n</code></em> which is substituted for the new password. The old passsword (<em class="parameter"><code>%o</code></em>) is only available when - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords</a> has been disabled. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords</a> has been disabled. The chat sequence can also contain the standard macros \n, \r, \t and \s to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab and space. The chat sequence string can also contain @@ -4168,17 +4213,17 @@ passwd chat (G) be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a single string.</p><p>If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a full stop ".", then no string is sent. Similarly, if the - expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.</p><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE">pam password change</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the + expect string is a full stop then no string is expected.</p><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PAMPASSWORDCHANGE" target="_top">pam password change</a> parameter is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the chat pairs may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, not any particular output. The \n macro is ignored for PAM conversions. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> = <code class="literal">*new*password* %n\n*new*password* %n\n *changed*</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd chat</code></em> = <code class="literal">"*Enter NEW password*" %n\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\n "*Password changed*"</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548243"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554458"></a> passwd program (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548244"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554459"></a><a name="PASSWDPROGRAM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords. Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%u</code></em> will be replaced with the user name. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program.</p><p>Also note that many passwd programs insist in <span class="emphasis"><em>reasonable @@ -4199,10 +4244,10 @@ passwd program (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>passwd program</code></em> = <code class="literal">/bin/passwd %u</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548378"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554593"></a> password level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548379"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554594"></a><a name="PASSWORDLEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when @@ -4220,14 +4265,14 @@ password level (G) process a new connection.</p><p>A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case.</p><p>This parameter is used only when using plain-text passwords. It is not at all used when encrypted passwords as in use (that is the default - since samba-3.0.0). Use this only when <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords = No</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> + since samba-3.0.0). Use this only when <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords = No</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password level</code></em> = <code class="literal">4</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548515"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554730"></a> password server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548516"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554731"></a><a name="PASSWORDSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>By specifying the name of another SMB server or Active Directory domain controller with this option, and using <code class="literal">security = [ads|domain|server]</code> it is possible to get Samba to @@ -4239,7 +4284,7 @@ password server (G) Samba will use the standard LDAP port of tcp/389. Note that port numbers have no effect on password servers for Windows NT 4.0 domains or netbios connections.</p><p>If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the - parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER">name resolve order</a> and so may resolved + parameter <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER" target="_top">name resolve order</a> and so may resolved by any method and order described in that parameter.</p><p>The password server must be a machine capable of using the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode.</p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>Using a password server means your UNIX box (running @@ -4287,13 +4332,13 @@ password server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>password server</code></em> = <code class="literal">windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548814"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555028"></a> <a name="DIRECTORY"></a>directory -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548815"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548845"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555030"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PATH">path</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555060"></a> path (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548846"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555061"></a><a name="PATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing.</p><p>For a printable service offering guest access, the service @@ -4305,24 +4350,24 @@ path (S) on this connection. Any occurrences of <em class="parameter"><code>%m</code></em> will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from. These replacements are very useful for setting - up pseudo home directories for users.</p><p>Note that this path will be based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ROOTDIR">root dir</a> + up pseudo home directories for users.</p><p>Note that this path will be based on <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ROOTDIR" target="_top">root dir</a> if one was specified.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>path</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/fred</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2548949"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555164"></a> pid directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2548950"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555165"></a><a name="PIDDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/var/locks</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>pid directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">pid directory = /var/run/</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549009"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555224"></a> posix locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549010"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555225"></a><a name="POSIXLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> The <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are @@ -4330,10 +4375,10 @@ posix locking (S) method (e.g. NFS or local file access). You should never need to disable this parameter. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>posix locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549064"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555279"></a> postexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549065"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555280"></a><a name="POSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected. It takes the usual substitutions. The command may be run as the root on some systems.</p><p>An interesting example may be to unmount server @@ -4341,44 +4386,44 @@ postexec (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549137"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555352"></a> preexec close (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549138"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXEC">preexec</a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555353"></a><a name="PREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXEC" target="_top">preexec</a> should close the service being connected to. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549191"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555407"></a> <a name="EXEC"></a>exec -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549192"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549222"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555408"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREEXEC">preexec</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555438"></a> preexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549224"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555439"></a><a name="PREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.</p><p>An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:</p><p> <code class="literal">preexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & </code> </p><p>Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)</p><p> - See also <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXECCLOSE">preexec close</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#POSTEXEC">postexec</a>. + See also <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PREEXECCLOSE" target="_top">preexec close</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#POSTEXEC" target="_top">postexec</a>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal">echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549331"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555547"></a> <a name="PREFEREDMASTER"></a>prefered master -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549332"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549364"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555548"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PREFERREDMASTER">preferred master</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555580"></a> preferred master (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549365"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555581"></a><a name="PREFERREDMASTER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> is a preferred master browser for its workgroup. </p><p> If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, on startup, <code class="literal">nmbd</code> will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the election. It is recommended that this - parameter is used in conjunction with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER">domain master = yes</a>, so that + parameter is used in conjunction with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DOMAINMASTER" target="_top">domain master = yes</a>, so that <code class="literal">nmbd</code> can guarantee becoming a domain master. </p><p> Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) @@ -4387,59 +4432,59 @@ preferred master (G) capabilities. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preferred master</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549457"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555673"></a> preload modules (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549458"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555674"></a><a name="PRELOADMODULES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload modules</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549517"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555734"></a> <a name="AUTOSERVICES"></a>auto services -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549518"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549550"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555735"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRELOAD">preload</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555767"></a> preload (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549551"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555768"></a><a name="PRELOAD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible.</p><p> Note that if you just want all printers in your - printcap file loaded then the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOADPRINTERS">load printers</a> + printcap file loaded then the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#LOADPRINTERS" target="_top">load printers</a> option is easier. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preload</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred lp colorlp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549628"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555845"></a> preserve case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549629"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555846"></a><a name="PRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if - they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE">default case</a>. + they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE" target="_top">default case</a>. </p><p> See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a> for a fuller discussion. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549694"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555912"></a> <a name="PRINTOK"></a>print ok -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549696"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549725"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555913"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTABLE">printable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555942"></a> printable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549726"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555944"></a><a name="PRINTABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service. </p><p>Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling - of print data. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a> parameter controls only non-printing access to + of print data. The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549788"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556006"></a> printcap cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549789"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556007"></a><a name="PRINTCAPCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the number of seconds before the printing subsystem is again asked for the known printers. If the value is greater than 60 the initial waiting time is set to 60 seconds to allow an earlier first rescan of the printing subsystem. @@ -4449,18 +4494,18 @@ printcap cache time (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">600</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549856"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556075"></a> <a name="PRINTCAP"></a>printcap -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549857"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2549889"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556076"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTCAPNAME">printcap name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556108"></a> printcap name (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2549890"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556109"></a><a name="PRINTCAPNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually <code class="filename"> /etc/printcap</code>). See the discussion of the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section">[printers]</a> section above for reasons why you might want to do this. </p><p> To use the CUPS printing interface set <code class="literal">printcap name = cups </code>. This should - be supplemented by an addtional setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing = cups</a> in the [global] + be supplemented by an addtional setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing = cups</a> in the [global] section. <code class="literal">printcap name = cups</code> will use the "dummy" printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration file. </p><p> @@ -4490,10 +4535,10 @@ print5|My Printer 5 </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printcap name</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/myprintcap</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550074"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556292"></a> print command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550075"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556293"></a><a name="PRINTCOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a <code class="literal">system()</code> call to process the spool file. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there @@ -4516,17 +4561,17 @@ print command (S) printable service nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</p><p>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the <code class="constant">nobody</code> account. If this happens then create - an alternative guest account that can print and set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a> + an alternative guest account that can print and set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a> in the [global] section.</p><p>You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they are just passed to a shell. For example the following will log a print job, print the file, then remove it. Note that ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts.</p><p><code class="literal">print command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s</code></p><p>You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you normally print files on your system. The default for - the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING">printing</a> + the parameter varies depending on the setting of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTING" target="_top">printing</a> parameter.</p><p>Default: For <code class="literal">printing = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :</code></p><p><code class="literal">print command = lpr -r -P%p %s</code></p><p>For <code class="literal">printing = SYSV or HPUX :</code></p><p><code class="literal">print command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s</code></p><p>For <code class="literal">printing = SOFTQ :</code></p><p><code class="literal">print command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s</code></p><p>For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against - libcups, then <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTCAP">printcap = cups</a> + libcups, then <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTCAP" target="_top">printcap = cups</a> uses the CUPS API to submit jobs, etc. Otherwise it maps to the System V commands with the -oraw option for printing, i.e. it @@ -4535,10 +4580,10 @@ print command (S) and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command will be ignored.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550344"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556568"></a> printer admin (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550345"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556570"></a><a name="PRINTERADMIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This lists users who can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation). @@ -4554,29 +4599,29 @@ printer admin (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer admin</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, @staff</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550413"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556638"></a> <a name="PRINTER"></a>printer -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550414"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550444"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556639"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556669"></a> printer name (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550445"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556670"></a><a name="PRINTERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent. </p><p> If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified. </p><p> - The default value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERNAME">printer name</a> may be <code class="literal">lp</code> on many + The default value of the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERNAME" target="_top">printer name</a> may be <code class="literal">lp</code> on many systems. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> = <code class="literal">none</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printer name</code></em> = <code class="literal">laserwriter</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550532"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556757"></a> printing (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550533"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status information is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556758"></a><a name="PRINTING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system. It also affects the default values for the <em class="parameter"><code>print command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpq command</code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lppause command </code></em>, <em class="parameter"><code>lpresume command</code></em>, and <em class="parameter"><code>lprm command</code></em> if specified in the [global] section.</p><p>Currently nine printing styles are supported. They are @@ -4590,27 +4635,30 @@ printing (S) commands (e.g. print command, lpq command, etc...) after defining the value for the <em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> option since it will reset the printing commands to default values.</p><p>See also the discussion in the <a class="link" href="#PRINTERSSECT" title="The [printers] section"> - [printers]</a> section.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550667"></a> + [printers]</a> section.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Depends on the operating system, see +<code class="literal">testparm -v.</code></code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556910"></a> printjob username (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550668"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556911"></a><a name="PRINTJOBUSERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies which user information will be passed to the printing system. Usually, the username is sent, but in some cases, e.g. the domain prefix is useful, too.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%U</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>printjob username</code></em> = <code class="literal">%D\%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550728"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556972"></a> private dir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550730"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556973"></a><a name="PRIVATEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code> and <code class="filename">secrets.tdb</code>. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>private dir</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550782"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557026"></a> profile acls (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550784"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557027"></a><a name="PROFILEACLS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service @@ -4638,10 +4686,10 @@ profile acls (S) tree to the owning user. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>profile acls</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550855"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557098"></a> queuepause command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550856"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557100"></a><a name="QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue.</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer.</p><p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, @@ -4652,13 +4700,13 @@ queuepause command (S) path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queuepause command</code></em> = <code class="literal">disable %p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2550932"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557175"></a> queueresume command (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2550933"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557176"></a><a name="QUEUERESUMECOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the - previous parameter (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND">queuepause command</a>).</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes + previous parameter (<a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#QUEUEPAUSECOMMAND" target="_top">queuepause command</a>).</p><p>This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer.</p><p>This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 @@ -4670,32 +4718,32 @@ queueresume command (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>queueresume command</code></em> = <code class="literal">enable %p</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551034"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557278"></a> read list (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551035"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557279"></a><a name="READLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list - then they will not be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a> option is set - to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INVALIDUSERS">invalid users</a> + then they will not be given write access, no matter what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> option is set + to. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#INVALIDUSERS" target="_top">invalid users</a> parameter. - </p><p>This parameter will not work with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = share</a> in + </p><p>This parameter will not work with the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> in Samba 3.0. This is by design.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read list</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read list</code></em> = <code class="literal">mary, @students</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551133"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557378"></a> read only (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551134"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557379"></a><a name="READONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>An inverted synonym is <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WRITEABLE" target="_top">writeable</a>.</p><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory.</p><p>Note that a printable service (<code class="literal">printable = yes</code>) will <span class="emphasis"><em>ALWAYS</em></span> allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read only</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551210"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557455"></a> read raw (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551211"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557456"></a><a name="READRAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients.</p><p>If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet. This typically provides a major performance benefit. @@ -4704,20 +4752,20 @@ read raw (G) sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads.</p><p>In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left severely alone.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>read raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551270"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557515"></a> realm (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551271"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557516"></a><a name="REALM"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option specifies the kerberos realm to use. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 <code class="literal">domain</code>. It is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>realm</code></em> = <code class="literal">mysambabox.mycompany.com</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551335"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557580"></a> registry shares (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551336"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557581"></a><a name="REGISTRYSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This turns on or off support for share definitions read from registry. Shares defined in <span class="emphasis"><em>smb.conf</em></span> take precedence over shares with the same name defined in @@ -4732,10 +4780,10 @@ registry shares (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>registry shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551421"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557666"></a> remote announce (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551422"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557667"></a><a name="REMOTEANNOUNCE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name. </p><p> @@ -4749,7 +4797,7 @@ remote announce (G) </pre><p> the above line would cause <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to announce itself to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names. If you leave out the - workgroup name then the one given in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP">workgroup</a> parameter + workgroup name then the one given in the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP" target="_top">workgroup</a> parameter is used instead. </p><p> The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote @@ -4759,10 +4807,10 @@ remote announce (G) See the chapter on Network Browsing in the Samba-HOWTO book. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote announce</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551526"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557771"></a> remote browse sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551527"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557772"></a><a name="REMOTEBROWSESYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to setup <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment. This option will allow you to @@ -4789,15 +4837,15 @@ remote browse sync (G) that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse master on its segment. </p><p> - The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#REMOTEBROWSESYNC">remote browse sync</a> may be used on networks + The <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#REMOTEBROWSESYNC" target="_top">remote browse sync</a> may be used on networks where there is no WINS server, and may be used on disjoint networks where each network has its own WINS server. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>remote browse sync</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551639"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557884"></a> rename user script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551640"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557885"></a><a name="RENAMEUSERSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the full pathname to a script that will be run as root by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> under special circumstances described below. </p><p> When a user with admin authority or SeAddUserPrivilege rights renames a user (e.g.: from the NT4 User Manager @@ -4815,10 +4863,10 @@ rename user script (G) needs to change for other applications using the same directory. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>rename user script</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551729"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557974"></a> reset on zero vc (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551730"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557975"></a><a name="RESETONZEROVC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean option controls whether an incoming session setup should kill other connections coming from the same IP. This matches the default Windows 2003 behaviour. @@ -4837,10 +4885,10 @@ reset on zero vc (G) </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>reset on zero vc</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551781"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558027"></a> restrict anonymous (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551782"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558028"></a><a name="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group list information is returned for an anonymous connection. and mirrors the effects of the </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -4860,26 +4908,26 @@ HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\ means. </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p> The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed - by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK">guest ok = yes</a> on any share. + by setting <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK" target="_top">guest ok = yes</a> on any share. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>restrict anonymous</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551873"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558111"></a> <a name="ROOT"></a>root -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551874"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551906"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558112"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558144"></a> <a name="ROOTDIR"></a>root dir -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551907"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2551938"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558145"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#ROOTDIRECTORY">root directory</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558176"></a> root directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2551939"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558177"></a><a name="ROOTDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The server will <code class="literal">chroot()</code> (i.e. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries. It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use ".." in file names to access other directories (depending on the setting of the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter). + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WIDESMBCONFOPTIONS" target="_top">wide smbconfoptions</a> parameter). </p><p>Adding a <em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> entry other than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price. It absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the @@ -4895,39 +4943,39 @@ root directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/homes/smb</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552062"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558307"></a> root postexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552063"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558308"></a><a name="ROOTPOSTEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>postexec</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root postexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552110"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558356"></a> root preexec close (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552112"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558357"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXECCLOSE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec close </code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec close</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552159"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558404"></a> root preexec (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552160"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558405"></a><a name="ROOTPREEXEC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is the same as the <em class="parameter"><code>preexec</code></em> parameter except that the command is run as root. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>root preexec</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552207"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558452"></a> security mask (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552208"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558453"></a><a name="SECURITYMASK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits will be set when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box. </p><p> This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the incoming permission bits, thus resetting - any bits not in this mask. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE">force security mode</a>, which works in a manner similar to this one but uses a logical OR instead of an AND. + any bits not in this mask. Make sure not to mix up this parameter with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE" target="_top">force security mode</a>, which works in a manner similar to this one but uses a logical OR instead of an AND. </p><p> Essentially, all bits set to zero in this mask will result in setting to zero the corresponding bits on the file permissions regardless of the previous status of this bits on the file. @@ -4941,10 +4989,10 @@ security mask (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security mask</code></em> = <code class="literal">0770</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2552314"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558559"></a> security (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2552315"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558560"></a><a name="SECURITY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the <code class="filename"> smb.conf</code> file.</p><p>The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> to turn share level security on or off. Clients decide @@ -4968,9 +5016,9 @@ security (G) want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares). This is commonly used for a shared printer server. It is more difficult to setup guest shares with <code class="literal">security = user</code>, see - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST">map to guest</a>parameter for details.</p><p>It is possible to use <code class="literal">smbd</code> in a <span class="emphasis"><em> + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a>parameter for details.</p><p>It is possible to use <code class="literal">smbd</code> in a <span class="emphasis"><em> hybrid mode</em></span> where it is offers both user and share - level security under different <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NETBIOSALIASES">NetBIOS aliases</a>. </p><p>The different settings will now be explained.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = SHARE</em></span></p><p>When clients connect to a share level security server they + level security under different <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#NETBIOSALIASES" target="_top">NetBIOS aliases</a>. </p><p>The different settings will now be explained.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSSHARE"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = SHARE</em></span></p><p>When clients connect to a share level security server they need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with @@ -4983,10 +5031,10 @@ security (G) in share level security, <code class="literal">smbd</code> uses several techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf of the client.</p><p>A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given - client password is constructed using the following methods :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY">guest only</a> parameter is set, then all the other - stages are missed and only the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a> username is checked. + client password is constructed using the following methods :</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p>If the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY" target="_top">guest only</a> parameter is set, then all the other + stages are missed and only the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a> username is checked. </p></li><li><p>Is a username is sent with the share connection - request, then this username (after mapping - see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP">username map</a>), + request, then this username (after mapping - see <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a>), is added as a potential username. </p></li><li><p>If the client did a previous <span class="emphasis"><em>logon </em></span> request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the @@ -4995,7 +5043,7 @@ security (G) added as a potential username. </p></li><li><p>The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a potential username. - </p></li><li><p>Any users on the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER">user</a> list are added as potential usernames. + </p></li><li><p>Any users on the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER" target="_top">user</a> list are added as potential usernames. </p></li></ul></div><p>If the <em class="parameter"><code>guest only</code></em> parameter is not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password. The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the @@ -5007,17 +5055,17 @@ security (G) be used in granting access.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"> NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSUSER"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = USER</em></span></p><p>This is the default security setting in Samba 3.0. With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a - valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP">username map</a> - parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS">encrypted passwords</a> parameter) can also - be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER">user</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY">guest only</a> if set are then applied and + valid username and password (which can be mapped using the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a> + parameter). Encrypted passwords (see the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter) can also + be used in this security mode. Parameters such as <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USER" target="_top">user</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTONLY" target="_top">guest only</a> if set are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after the user has been successfully authenticated.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>Note</em></span> that the name of the resource being requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing - the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a>. - See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = DOMAIN</em></span></p><p>This mode will only work correctly if <a class="citerefentry" href="net.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">net</span>(8)</span></a> has been used to add this - machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS">encrypted passwords</a> + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. + See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION">NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSDOMAIN"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = DOMAIN</em></span></p><p>This mode will only work correctly if <a class="citerefentry" href="net.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">net</span>(8)</span></a> has been used to add this + machine into a Windows NT Domain. It expects the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter to be set to <code class="constant">yes</code>. In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly @@ -5031,13 +5079,13 @@ security (G) requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing - the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a>. - See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"> - NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER">password server</a> parameter and - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS">encrypted passwords</a> parameter.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = SERVER</em></span></p><p> + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. + See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"> + NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> parameter and + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSSERVER"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = SERVER</em></span></p><p> In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box. If this fails it will revert to <code class="literal">security = user</code>. It expects the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS">encrypted passwords</a> parameter to be set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, unless the remote + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter to be set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, unless the remote server does not support them. However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid <code class="filename">smbpasswd</code> file to check users against. See the chapter about the User Database in the Samba HOWTO Collection for details on how to set this up. @@ -5057,10 +5105,10 @@ security (G) requested is <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing - the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT">guest account</a>. - See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"> - NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER">password server</a> parameter and the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS">encrypted passwords</a> parameter.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSADS"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = ADS</em></span></p><p>In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm. To operate + the server to automatically map unknown users into the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTACCOUNT" target="_top">guest account</a>. + See the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST" target="_top">map to guest</a> parameter for details on doing this.</p><p>See also the section <a class="link" href="#VALIDATIONSECT" title="NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"> + NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</a>.</p><p>See also the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> parameter and the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTEDPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypted passwords</a> parameter.</p><p><a name="SECURITYEQUALSADS"></a><span class="emphasis"><em>SECURITY = ADS</em></span></p><p>In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm. To operate in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have Kerberos installed and configured and Samba will need to be joined to the ADS realm using the net utility. </p><p>Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active Directory Domain @@ -5068,12 +5116,12 @@ security (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>security</code></em> = <code class="literal">DOMAIN</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553192"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559437"></a> server schannel (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553194"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559438"></a><a name="SERVERSCHANNEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel. - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL">server schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL">server schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL">server schannel = yes</a> denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = no</a> does not offer the schannel, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = auto</a> offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSCHANNEL" target="_top">server schannel = yes</a> denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4. </p><p> Please note that with this set to <code class="literal">no</code> you will have to apply the WindowsXP @@ -5082,10 +5130,10 @@ server schannel (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server schannel</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553308"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559553"></a> server signing (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553309"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the server offers or requires +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559554"></a><a name="SERVERSIGNING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls whether the server offers or requires the client it talks to to use SMB signing. Possible values are <span class="emphasis"><em>auto</em></span>, <span class="emphasis"><em>mandatory</em></span> and <span class="emphasis"><em>disabled</em></span>. @@ -5093,10 +5141,10 @@ server signing (G) When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server signing</code></em> = <code class="literal">Disabled</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553370"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559614"></a> server string (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553371"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559615"></a><a name="SERVERSTRING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in <code class="literal">net view</code>. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users.</p><p>It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine name.</p><p>A <em class="parameter"><code>%v</code></em> will be replaced with the Samba @@ -5105,10 +5153,10 @@ server string (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>server string</code></em> = <code class="literal">University of GNUs Samba Server</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553461"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559706"></a> set directory (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553462"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559707"></a><a name="SETDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If <code class="literal">set directory = no</code>, then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory. </p><p> @@ -5117,10 +5165,10 @@ set directory (S) for details. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553521"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559766"></a> set primary group script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553522"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559767"></a><a name="SETPRIMARYGROUPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups. This script sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the primary group from the windows user @@ -5132,10 +5180,10 @@ set primary group script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set primary group script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553603"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559848"></a> set quota command (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553604"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559849"></a><a name="SETQUOTACOMMAND"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>The <code class="literal">set quota command</code> should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use.</p><p>This option is only available if Samba was configured with the argument <code class="literal">--with-sys-quotas</code> or on linux when <code class="literal">./configure --with-quotas</code> was used and a working quota api @@ -5145,36 +5193,35 @@ set quota command (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>set quota command</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/sbin/set_quota</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553766"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560011"></a> share modes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553767"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of - the <em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> during a file open. These - modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access - to a file.</p><p>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so - they are simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your - UNIX doesn't support shared memory (almost all do).</p><p>The share modes that are enabled by this option are - <code class="constant">DENY_DOS</code>, <code class="constant">DENY_ALL</code>, - <code class="constant">DENY_READ</code>, <code class="constant">DENY_WRITE</code>, - <code class="constant">DENY_NONE</code> and <code class="constant">DENY_FCB</code>. - </p><p>This option gives full share compatibility and enabled - by default.</p><p>You should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> turn this parameter +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560012"></a><a name="SHAREMODES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This enables or disables the honoring of + the <em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> during a file open. These + modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access + to a file.</p><p>This is a deprecated option from old versions of + Samba, and will be removed in the next major release. + </p><p>These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so + they are simulated using shared memory.</p><p>The share modes that are enabled by this option are + the standard Windows share modes. + </p><p>This option gives full share compatibility and is enabled + by default.</p><p>You should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>share modes</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553860"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560088"></a> short preserve case (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553861"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560089"></a><a name="SHORTPRESERVECASE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of - suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE">default case</a>. - This option can be use with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE">preserve case = yes</a> to permit long filenames + suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DEFAULTCASE" target="_top">default case</a>. + This option can be use with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PRESERVECASE" target="_top">preserve case = yes</a> to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered. </p><p>See the section on <a class="link" href="#NAMEMANGLINGSECT" title="NAME MANGLING">NAME MANGLING</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>short preserve case</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2553939"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560167"></a> show add printer wizard (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2553940"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560168"></a><a name="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is @@ -5192,10 +5239,10 @@ show add printer wizard (G) </p><div class="note" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Note</h3><p>This does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer.</p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>show add printer wizard</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554023"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560251"></a> shutdown script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554024"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560252"></a><a name="SHUTDOWNSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This a full path name to a script called by <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> that should start a shutdown procedure.</p><p>If the connected user posseses the <code class="constant">SeRemoteShutdownPrivilege</code>, right, this command will be run as user.</p><p>The %z %t %r %f variables are expanded as follows:</p><div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc"><li><p><em class="parameter"><code>%z</code></em> will be substituted with the @@ -5220,10 +5267,10 @@ let "time++" </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>shutdown script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554177"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560404"></a> smb encrypt (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554178"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560405"></a><a name="SMBENCRYPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a new feature introduced with Samba 3.2 and above. It is an extension to the SMB/CIFS protocol negotiated as part of the UNIX extensions. SMB encryption uses the GSSAPI (SSPI on Windows) ability to encrypt and sign every request/response in a SMB protocol stream. When @@ -5246,16 +5293,16 @@ smb encrypt (S) style read/writes allowed) as well as the overhead of encrypting and signing all the data. </p><p>If SMB encryption is selected, Windows style SMB signing (see - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSIGNING">server signing</a> option) is no longer necessary, + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SERVERSIGNING" target="_top">server signing</a> option) is no longer necessary, as the GSSAPI flags use select both signing and sealing of the data. </p><p>When set to auto, SMB encryption is offered, but not enforced. When set to mandatory, SMB encryption is required and if set to disabled, SMB encryption can not be negotiated.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb encrypt</code></em> = <code class="literal">auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554283"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560511"></a> smb passwd file (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554284"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560512"></a><a name="SMBPASSWDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba.</p><p> An example of use is: </p><pre class="programlisting"> @@ -5263,26 +5310,27 @@ smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb passwd file</code></em> = <code class="literal">${prefix}/private/smbpasswd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554337"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560564"></a> smb ports (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554338"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560565"></a><a name="SMBPORTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>smb ports</code></em> = <code class="literal">445 139</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554378"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560606"></a> socket address (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554380"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what - address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to - support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each - with a different configuration.</p><p>By default Samba will accept connections on any +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560607"></a><a name="SOCKETADDRESS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to control what + address Samba will listen for connections on. This is used to + support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each + with a different configuration.</p><p>Setting this option should never be necessary on usual Samba + servers running only one nmbd.</p><p>By default Samba will accept connections on any address.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket address</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket address</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.168.2.20</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554444"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560676"></a> socket options (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554445"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560677"></a><a name="SOCKETOPTIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client.</p><p>Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned.</p><p>This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server @@ -5310,32 +5358,32 @@ socket options (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>socket options</code></em> = <code class="literal">IPTOS_LOWDELAY</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554654"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560887"></a> stat cache (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554655"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560888"></a><a name="STATCACHE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a> will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings. You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>stat cache</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554705"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2560938"></a> store dos attributes (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554706"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2560939"></a><a name="STOREDOSATTRIBUTES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set Samba attempts to first read DOS attributes (SYSTEM, HIDDEN, ARCHIVE or READ-ONLY) from a filesystem extended attribute, before mapping DOS attributes to UNIX permission bits (such - as occurs with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY">map readonly</a>). When set, DOS + as occurs with <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY" target="_top">map readonly</a>). When set, DOS attributes will be stored onto an extended attribute in the UNIX filesystem, associated with the file or - directory. For no other mapping to occur as a fall-back, the parameters <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN">map hidden</a>, - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPSYSTEM">map system</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPARCHIVE">map archive</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY">map readonly</a> must be set to off. This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a string into the extended + directory. For no other mapping to occur as a fall-back, the parameters <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPHIDDEN" target="_top">map hidden</a>, + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPSYSTEM" target="_top">map system</a>, <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPARCHIVE" target="_top">map archive</a> and <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#MAPREADONLY" target="_top">map readonly</a> must be set to off. This parameter writes the DOS attributes as a string into the extended attribute named "user.DOSATTRIB". This extended attribute is explicitly hidden from smbd clients requesting an EA list. On Linux the filesystem must have been mounted with the mount option user_xattr in order for extended attributes to work, also extended attributes must be compiled into the Linux kernel. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>store dos attributes</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554827"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561060"></a> strict allocate (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554828"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561061"></a><a name="STRICTALLOCATE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour @@ -5347,10 +5395,10 @@ strict allocate (S) out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota of users.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict allocate</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554897"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561130"></a> strict locking (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554898"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561131"></a><a name="STRICTLOCKING"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is an enumerated type that controls the handling of file locking in the server. When this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code>, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist. This can be slow on some systems. @@ -5366,10 +5414,10 @@ strict locking (S) <code class="literal">strict locking = no</code> is acceptable. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict locking</code></em> = <code class="literal">Auto</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2554976"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561209"></a> strict sync (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2554977"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561210"></a><a name="STRICTSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in @@ -5383,10 +5431,10 @@ strict sync (S) addition, this fixes many performance problems that people have reported with the new Windows98 explorer shell file copies.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>strict sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555041"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561274"></a> svcctl list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555042"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561275"></a><a name="SVCCTLLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option defines a list of init scripts that smbd will use for starting and stopping Unix services via the Win32 ServiceControl API. This allows Windows administrators to utilize the MS Management Console plug-ins to manage a @@ -5399,10 +5447,10 @@ svcctl list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>svcctl list</code></em> = <code class="literal">cups postfix portmap httpd</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555126"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561360"></a> sync always (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555127"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561361"></a><a name="SYNCALWAYS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns. If this is <code class="constant">no</code> then the server will be guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can @@ -5413,19 +5461,19 @@ sync always (S) <code class="constant">yes</code> in order for this parameter to have any affect.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>sync always</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555197"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561430"></a> syslog only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555198"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561432"></a><a name="SYSLOGONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files. There still will be some logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555244"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561478"></a> syslog (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555245"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561479"></a><a name="SYSLOG"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog <code class="constant">LOG_ERR</code>, debug level one maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_WARNING</code>, debug level two maps onto <code class="constant">LOG_NOTICE</code>, @@ -5436,10 +5484,10 @@ syslog (G) logging to log.[sn]mbd even if <span class="emphasis"><em>syslog only</em></span> is enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>syslog</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555315"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561548"></a> template homedir (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555316"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561550"></a><a name="TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user. If the string <em class="parameter"><code>%D</code></em> is present it @@ -5447,31 +5495,31 @@ template homedir (G) string <em class="parameter"><code>%U</code></em> is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT user name.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>template homedir</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home/%D/%U</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555380"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561614"></a> template shell (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555381"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561615"></a><a name="TEMPLATESHELL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon uses this - parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555419"></a> + parameter to fill in the login shell for that user.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561653"></a> time offset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555420"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561654"></a><a name="TIMEOFFSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time offset</code></em> = <code class="literal">60</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555479"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561713"></a> time server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555480"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561714"></a><a name="TIMESERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter determines if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>time server</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555529"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561764"></a> unix charset (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555530"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561765"></a><a name="UNIXCHARSET"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use. </p><p>This is also the charset Samba will use when specifying arguments @@ -5480,20 +5528,20 @@ unix charset (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix charset</code></em> = <code class="literal">ASCII</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555595"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561830"></a> unix extensions (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555596"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561831"></a><a name="UNIXEXTENSIONS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc... These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of no current use to Windows clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix extensions</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555643"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561877"></a> unix password sync (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555644"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561878"></a><a name="UNIXPASSWORDSYNC"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed. If this is set to <code class="constant">yes</code> the program specified in the <em class="parameter"><code>passwd @@ -5502,10 +5550,10 @@ unix password sync (G) old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new).</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>unix password sync</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555704"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2561938"></a> update encrypted (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555705"></a><a name="UPDATEENCRYPTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2561939"></a><a name="UPDATEENCRYPTED"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as they log on. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext password over the @@ -5515,18 +5563,18 @@ update encrypted (G) passwords to be made over a longer period. Once all users have encrypted representations of their passwords in the smbpasswd file this parameter should be set to <code class="constant">no</code>. </p><p> - In order for this parameter to be operative the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords</a> parameter must - be set to <code class="constant">no</code>. The default value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS">encrypt passwords = Yes</a>. Note: This must be set to <code class="constant">no</code> for this <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UPDATEENCRYPTED">update encrypted</a> to work. + In order for this parameter to be operative the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords</a> parameter must + be set to <code class="constant">no</code>. The default value of <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS" target="_top">encrypt passwords = Yes</a>. Note: This must be set to <code class="constant">no</code> for this <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#UPDATEENCRYPTED" target="_top">update encrypted</a> to work. </p><p> Note that even when this parameter is set a user authenticating to <code class="literal">smbd</code> must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) passwords. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>update encrypted</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555822"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562056"></a> use client driver (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555823"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562058"></a><a name="USECLIENTDRIVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients. It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required @@ -5551,10 +5599,10 @@ use client driver (S) on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server.</em></span></p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use client driver</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555914"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562137"></a> use kerberos keytab (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555916"></a><a name="USEKERBEROSKEYTAB"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562138"></a><a name="USEKERBEROSKEYTAB"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Specifies whether Samba should attempt to maintain service principals in the systems keytab file for <code class="constant">host/FQDN</code> and <code class="constant">cifs/FQDN</code>. </p><p> @@ -5566,10 +5614,10 @@ default_keytab_name = FILE:/etc/krb5.keytab </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use kerberos keytab</code></em> = <code class="literal">False</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2555983"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562206"></a> use mmap (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2555984"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562207"></a><a name="USEMMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache. Currently only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to <code class="constant">no</code> by @@ -5578,10 +5626,10 @@ use mmap (G) the tdb internal code. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use mmap</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556035"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562258"></a> username level (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556036"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562259"></a><a name="USERNAMELEVEL"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the @@ -5596,11 +5644,11 @@ username level (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username level</code></em> = <code class="literal">5</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556117"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562340"></a> username map script (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556118"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP">username map</a> parameter. This parameter +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562341"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAPSCRIPT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This script is a mutually exclusive alternative to the + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMEMAP" target="_top">username map</a> parameter. This parameter specifies and external program or script that must accept a single command line option (the username transmitted in the authentication request) and return a line line on standard output (the name to which @@ -5610,10 +5658,10 @@ username map script (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map script</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc/samba/scripts/mapusers.sh</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556193"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562416"></a> username map (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556194"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562418"></a><a name="USERNAMEMAP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server. This can be used for several purposes. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they @@ -5669,7 +5717,7 @@ guest = * Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames. Thus if you connect to \\server\fred and <code class="constant">fred</code> is remapped to <code class="constant">mary</code> then you will actually be connecting to \\server\mary and will need to supply a password suitable for <code class="constant">mary</code> not - <code class="constant">fred</code>. The only exception to this is the username passed to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER">password server</a> (if you have one). The password server will receive whatever username the client + <code class="constant">fred</code>. The only exception to this is the username passed to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER" target="_top">password server</a> (if you have one). The password server will receive whatever username the client supplies without modification. </p><p> Also note that no reverse mapping is done. The main effect this has is with printing. Users who have been @@ -5697,16 +5745,16 @@ username map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username map</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # no username map</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556473"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562703"></a> <a name="USER"></a>user -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556474"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556505"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562704"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562735"></a> <a name="USERS"></a>users -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556506"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556537"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562736"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#USERNAME">username</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562767"></a> username (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556538"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562768"></a><a name="USERNAME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right).</p><p>The <em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username. This is the case @@ -5725,7 +5773,7 @@ username (S) they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do.</p><p>To restrict a service to a particular set of users you - can use the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VALIDUSERS">valid users</a> parameter.</p><p>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name + can use the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VALIDUSERS" target="_top">valid users</a> parameter.</p><p>If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users @@ -5744,28 +5792,28 @@ username (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>username</code></em> = <code class="literal">fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556707"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562937"></a> usershare allow guests (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556708"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562938"></a><a name="USERSHAREALLOWGUESTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether user defined shares are allowed to be accessed by non-authenticated users or not. It is the equivalent of allowing people who can create a share the option of setting <em class="parameter"><code>guest ok = yes</code></em> in a share definition. Due to the security sensitive nature of this the default is set to off.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare allow guests</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556760"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2562990"></a> usershare max shares (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556761"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2562991"></a><a name="USERSHAREMAXSHARES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of user defined shares that are allowed to be created by users belonging to the group owning the usershare directory. If set to zero (the default) user defined shares are ignored. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare max shares</code></em> = <code class="literal">0</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556805"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563035"></a> usershare owner only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556806"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563036"></a><a name="USERSHAREOWNERONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether the pathname exported by a user defined shares must be owned by the user creating the user defined share or not. If set to True (the default) then smbd checks that the directory path being shared is owned by @@ -5775,10 +5823,10 @@ usershare owner only (G) regardless of who owns it. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare owner only</code></em> = <code class="literal">True</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556855"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563085"></a> usershare path (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556856"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563086"></a><a name="USERSHAREPATH"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the absolute path of the directory on the filesystem used to store the user defined share definition files. This directory must be owned by root, and have no access for other, and be writable only by the group owner. In addition the @@ -5799,10 +5847,10 @@ usershare path (G) In this case, only members of the group "power_users" can create user defined shares. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare path</code></em> = <code class="literal">NULL</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556926"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563156"></a> usershare prefix allow list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556927"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563157"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXALLOWLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. If the pathname exported doesn't start with one of the strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed. This allows the Samba @@ -5817,10 +5865,10 @@ usershare prefix allow list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix allow list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/home /data /space</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2556998"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563228"></a> usershare prefix deny list (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2556999"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563230"></a><a name="USERSHAREPREFIXDENYLIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies a list of absolute pathnames the root of which are NOT allowed to be exported by user defined share definitions. If the pathname exported starts with one of the strings in this list the user defined share will not be allowed. Any pathname not @@ -5836,10 +5884,10 @@ usershare prefix deny list (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare prefix deny list</code></em> = <code class="literal">/etc /dev /private</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557073"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563303"></a> usershare template share (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557074"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563304"></a><a name="USERSHARETEMPLATESHARE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>User defined shares only have limited possible parameters such as path, guest ok etc. This parameter allows usershares to "cloned" from an existing share. If "usershare template share" is set to the name of an existing share, then all usershares @@ -5854,10 +5902,10 @@ usershare template share (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>usershare template share</code></em> = <code class="literal">template_share</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557146"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563376"></a> use sendfile (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557147"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563377"></a><a name="USESENDFILE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this parameter is <code class="constant">yes</code>, and the <code class="constant">sendfile()</code> system call is supported by the underlying operating system, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's @@ -5866,10 +5914,10 @@ use sendfile (S) Windows 9x (using sendfile from Linux will cause these clients to fail). </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use sendfile</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557203"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563433"></a> use spnego (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557204"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This variable controls controls whether samba will try +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563434"></a><a name="USESPNEGO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism. </p><p> @@ -5877,10 +5925,10 @@ use spnego (G) implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>use spnego</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557252"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563483"></a> utmp directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557254"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563484"></a><a name="UTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal"> --with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that @@ -5892,10 +5940,10 @@ utmp directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/run/utmp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557330"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563561"></a> utmp (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557332"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563562"></a><a name="UTMP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal">--with-utmp</code>. If set to <code class="constant">yes</code> then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records @@ -5907,10 +5955,10 @@ utmp (G) to find this number. This may impede performance on large installations. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>utmp</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557393"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563624"></a> valid users (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557394"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563625"></a><a name="VALIDUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the <em class="parameter"><code>invalid users</code></em> parameter. @@ -5926,10 +5974,10 @@ valid users (S) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>valid users</code></em> = <code class="literal">greg, @pcusers</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557484"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563715"></a> -valid (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557486"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563716"></a><a name="-VALID"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible. </p><p> @@ -5938,10 +5986,10 @@ valid users (S) Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>-valid</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557534"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563765"></a> veto files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557535"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563766"></a><a name="VETOFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards. @@ -5949,11 +5997,11 @@ veto files (S) Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> include the unix directory separator '/'. </p><p> - Note that the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CASESENSITIVE">case sensitive</a> option is applicable in vetoing files. + Note that the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#CASESENSITIVE" target="_top">case sensitive</a> option is applicable in vetoing files. </p><p> One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when trying to delete a directory. If a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this - deletion will <span class="emphasis"><em>fail</em></span> unless you also set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEVETOFILES">delete veto files</a> + deletion will <span class="emphasis"><em>fail</em></span> unless you also set the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEVETOFILES" target="_top">delete veto files</a> parameter to <em class="parameter"><code>yes</code></em>. </p><p> Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files @@ -5972,15 +6020,15 @@ veto files = /.AppleDouble/.bin/.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/ </pre><p> </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto files</code></em> = <code class="literal">No files or directories are vetoed.</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557652"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563883"></a> veto oplock files (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557654"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> - This parameter is only valid when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS">oplocks</a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563884"></a><a name="VETOOPLOCKFILES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> + This parameter is only valid when the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#OPLOCKS" target="_top">oplocks</a> parameter is turned on for a share. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES">veto files</a> parameter. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#VETOFILES" target="_top">veto files</a> parameter. </p><p> You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily contended for by clients. A good example of this is in the NetBench SMB benchmark @@ -5996,31 +6044,31 @@ veto oplock files = /.*SEM/ </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>veto oplock files</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # No files are vetoed for oplock grants</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557746"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2563976"></a> <a name="VFSOBJECT"></a>vfs object -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557747"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557778"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2563978"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#VFSOBJECTS">vfs objects</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564008"></a> vfs objects (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557779"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564010"></a><a name="VFSOBJECTS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>vfs objects</code></em> = <code class="literal">extd_audit recycle</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557838"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564068"></a> volume (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557839"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564070"></a><a name="VOLUME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>volume</code></em> = <code class="literal"> # the name of the share</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557881"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564112"></a> wide links (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557882"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564113"></a><a name="WIDELINKS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only @@ -6028,21 +6076,21 @@ wide links (S) effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wide links</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2557933"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564164"></a> winbind cache time (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2557934"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564165"></a><a name="WINBINDCACHETIME"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again.</p><p> This does not apply to authentication requests, these are always - evaluated in real time unless the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDOFFLINELOGON">winbind offline logon</a> option has been enabled. + evaluated in real time unless the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDOFFLINELOGON" target="_top">winbind offline logon</a> option has been enabled. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind cache time</code></em> = <code class="literal">300</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558005"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564236"></a> winbind enum groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558006"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564237"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the <code class="literal">setgrent()</code>, <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> and <code class="literal">endgrent()</code> group of system calls. If @@ -6050,10 +6098,10 @@ winbind enum groups (G) <code class="constant">no</code>, calls to the <code class="literal">getgrent()</code> system call will not return any data. </p><div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;"><h3 class="title">Warning</h3><p>Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558095"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564326"></a> winbind enum users (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558096"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564328"></a><a name="WINBINDENUMUSERS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>On large installations using <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the <code class="literal">setpwent()</code>, <code class="literal">getpwent()</code> and <code class="literal">endpwent()</code> group of system calls. If @@ -6065,13 +6113,13 @@ winbind enum users (G) full user list when searching for matching usernames. </p></div><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind enum users</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558189"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564420"></a> winbind expand groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558190"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564421"></a><a name="WINBINDEXPANDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This option controls the maximum depth that winbindd will traverse when flattening nested group memberships of Windows domain groups. This is different from the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS">winbind nested groups</a> option + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS" target="_top">winbind nested groups</a> option which implements the Windows NT4 model of local group nesting. The "winbind expand groups" parameter specifically applies to the membership of @@ -6080,10 +6128,10 @@ winbind expand groups (G) must perform the group unrolling and will be unable to answer incoming NSS or authentication requests during this time.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind expand groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">1</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558257"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564489"></a> winbind nested groups (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558258"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564490"></a><a name="WINBINDNESTEDGROUPS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If set to yes, this parameter activates the support for nested groups. Nested groups are also called local groups or aliases. They work like their counterparts in Windows: Nested groups are defined locally on any machine (they are shared @@ -6091,25 +6139,33 @@ winbind nested groups (G) global groups from any trusted SAM. To be able to use nested groups, you need to run nss_winbind.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nested groups</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558307"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564539"></a> winbind normalize names (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558308"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace - whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character. - For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be - replaced with the string "space_kadet". - Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty with usernames - contains whitespace due to the default field separator in the shell. - Do not enable this option if the underscore character is used in - account names within your domain - </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564540"></a><a name="WINBINDNORMALIZENAMES"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether winbindd will replace + whitespace in user and group names with an underscore (_) character. + For example, whether the name "Space Kadet" should be + replaced with the string "space_kadet". + Frequently Unix shell scripts will have difficulty with usernames + contains whitespace due to the default field separator in the shell. + If your domain possesses names containing the underscore character, + this option may cause problems unless the name aliasing feature + is supported by your nss_info plugin. + </p><p>This feature also enables the name aliasing API which can + be used to make domain user and group names to a non-qlaified + version. Please refer to the manpage for the configured + idmap and nss_info plugin for the specifics on how to configure + name aliasing for a specific configuration. Name aliasing takes + precendence (and is mutually exclusive) over the whitespace + replacement mechanism discussed previsouly. + </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind normalize names</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558373"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564617"></a> winbind nss info (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558374"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564618"></a><a name="WINBINDNSSINFO"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control how Winbind retrieves Name Service Information to construct a user's home directory and login shell. Currently the following settings are available: @@ -6131,10 +6187,10 @@ winbind nss info (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind nss info</code></em> = <code class="literal">template sfu</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558493"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564736"></a> winbind offline logon (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558494"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564738"></a><a name="WINBINDOFFLINELOGON"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should allow to login with the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module using Cached Credentials. If enabled, winbindd will store user credentials from successful logins encrypted in a local cache. @@ -6142,29 +6198,37 @@ winbind offline logon (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind offline logon</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558562"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564806"></a> + +winbind reconnect delay (G) +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564807"></a><a name="WINBINDRECONNECTDELAY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies the number of + seconds the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon will wait between + attempts to contact a Domain controller for a domain that is + determined to be down or not contactable.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind reconnect delay</code></em> = <code class="literal">30</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564858"></a> winbind refresh tickets (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558563"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564860"></a><a name="WINBINDREFRESHTICKETS"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is designed to control whether Winbind should refresh Kerberos Tickets retrieved using the <em class="parameter"><code>pam_winbind</code></em> module. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">false</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind refresh tickets</code></em> = <code class="literal">true</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558628"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564926"></a> winbind rpc only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558630"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564927"></a><a name="WINBINDRPCONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> Setting this parameter to <code class="literal">yes</code> forces winbindd to use RPC instead of LDAP to retrieve information from Domain Controllers. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind rpc only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558677"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2564974"></a> winbind separator (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558678"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2564975"></a><a name="WINBINDSEPARATOR"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of <em class="replaceable"><code>DOMAIN </code></em>\<em class="replaceable"><code>user</code></em>. This parameter is only applicable when using the <code class="filename">pam_winbind.so</code> @@ -6175,10 +6239,10 @@ winbind separator (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind separator</code></em> = <code class="literal">+</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558764"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565061"></a> winbind trusted domains only (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558765"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565062"></a><a name="WINBINDTRUSTEDDOMAINSONLY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed via NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid's for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain. @@ -6186,14 +6250,13 @@ winbind trusted domains only (G) the account user1 in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid for him or her. </p><p> This parameter is now deprecated in favor of the newer idmap_nss backend. - Refer to the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#IDMAPDOMAINS">idmap domains</a> smb.conf option and - the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information. + Refer to the <a class="citerefentry" href="idmap_nss.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">idmap_nss</span>(8)</span></a> man page for more information. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind trusted domains only</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558844"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565128"></a> winbind use default domain (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558845"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565130"></a><a name="WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter specifies whether the <a class="citerefentry" href="winbindd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">winbindd</span>(8)</span></a> daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own @@ -6203,10 +6266,10 @@ winbind use default domain (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>winbind use default domain</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2558916"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565201"></a> wins hook (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2558917"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565202"></a><a name="WINSHOOK"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database. The primary use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as @@ -6227,17 +6290,17 @@ wins hook (G) addresses currently registered for that name. If this list is empty then the name should be deleted.</p></li></ul></div><p>An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program <code class="literal">nsupdate</code> is provided in the examples - directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559022"></a> + directory of the Samba source code. </p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565308"></a> wins proxy (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559024"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565309"></a><a name="WINSPROXY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This is a boolean that controls if <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> for some older clients.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins proxy</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559077"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565362"></a> wins server (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559078"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565364"></a><a name="WINSSERVER"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) of the WINS server that <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> should register with. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</p><p>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network.</p><p>If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can @@ -6256,36 +6319,38 @@ wins server (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins server</code></em> = <code class="literal">192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559188"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565473"></a> wins support (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559189"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565474"></a><a name="WINSSUPPORT"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This boolean controls if the <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a> process in Samba will act as a WINS server. You should not set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular <code class="literal">nmbd</code> to be your WINS server. Note that you should <span class="emphasis"><em>NEVER</em></span> set this to <code class="constant">yes</code> on more than one machine in your network.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wins support</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559257"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565542"></a> workgroup (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559258"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565543"></a><a name="WORKGROUP"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with - the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = domain</a> + the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = domain</a> setting.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>workgroup</code></em> = <code class="literal">WORKGROUP</code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>workgroup</code></em> = <code class="literal">MYGROUP</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559329"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565615"></a> <a name="WRITABLE"></a>writable -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559330"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559360"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565616"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter is a synonym for <a class="link" href="#WRITEABLE">writeable</a>.</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565646"></a> writeable (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559362"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a>.</p><p><span class="emphasis"><em>No default</em></span></p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559399"></a> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565647"></a><a name="WRITEABLE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>Inverted synonym for <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a>.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>writeable</code></em> = <code class="literal">no</code> +</em></span> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565697"></a> write cache size (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559400"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565698"></a><a name="WRITECACHESIZE"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does <span class="emphasis"><em>not</em></span> do this for non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request @@ -6303,35 +6368,35 @@ write cache size (S) </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write cache size</code></em> = <code class="literal">262144 # for a 256k cache size per file</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559483"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565781"></a> write list (S) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559484"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565782"></a><a name="WRITELIST"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter - what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY">read only</a> option is set to. The list can + what the <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#READONLY" target="_top">read only</a> option is set to. The list can include group names using the @group syntax. </p><p> Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then they will be given write access. </p><p> By design, this parameter will not work with the - <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY">security = share</a> in Samba 3.0. + <a class="link" href="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY" target="_top">security = share</a> in Samba 3.0. </p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write list</code></em> = <code class="literal"></code> </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write list</code></em> = <code class="literal">admin, root, @staff</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559576"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565874"></a> write raw (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559577"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565875"></a><a name="WRITERAW"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p>This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients. You should never need to change this parameter.</p><p>Default: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>write raw</code></em> = <code class="literal">yes</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2559620"></a> +</p></dd></dl></div></div><div class="section" lang="en"><div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title"><a name="id2565918"></a> wtmp directory (G) -</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2559621"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> +</h3></div></div></div><a class="indexterm" name="id2565919"></a><a name="WTMPDIRECTORY"></a><div class="variablelist"><dl><dt></dt><dd><p> This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option <code class="literal"> --with-utmp</code>. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact @@ -6343,7 +6408,7 @@ wtmp directory (G) </em></span> </p><p>Example: <span class="emphasis"><em><em class="parameter"><code>wtmp directory</code></em> = <code class="literal">/var/log/wtmp</code> </em></span> -</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559703"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p> +</p></dd></dl></div></div></div></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2566002"></a><h2>WARNINGS</h2><p> Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility. </p><p> @@ -6356,8 +6421,8 @@ wtmp directory (G) for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky. Take extreme care when designing these sections. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct. - </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559753"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559764"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> - <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2559844"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> + </p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2566052"></a><h2>VERSION</h2><p>This man page is correct for version 3 of the Samba suite.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2566062"></a><h2>SEE ALSO</h2><p> + <a class="citerefentry" href="samba.7.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">samba</span>(7)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbpasswd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbpasswd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="swat.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">swat</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmbd.8.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmbd</span>(8)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="smbclient.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">smbclient</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="nmblookup.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">nmblookup</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testparm.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testparm</span>(1)</span></a>, <a class="citerefentry" href="testprns.1.html"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">testprns</span>(1)</span></a>.</p></div><div class="refsect1" lang="en"><a name="id2566142"></a><h2>AUTHOR</h2><p> The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed. </p><p> |